JP2012223653A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve amusements of a game and more technical intervention feelings of a player and to increase the value of an operation means, in a game machine including the operation means that the player can operate.SOLUTION: When variable display by a division variation pattern is started, a selection screen is displayed after a variation pattern opening part is ended, and when the player moves a pointer 52 to a desired position by a cross switch 50 and pressurizes a determination button 51, the selection screen is immediately switched and the variable display is started again. At the time, on the basis of timing of pressurizing the determination button 51 and the time until pressurization is performed, one is selected and displayed from among a plurality of variation pattern main parts different in performance effects and a second performance character by random number processing. On the other hand, when the determination button 51 is not pressurized during the valid time of the determination button 51, the variation pattern main part of the lowest performance effect is selected and displayed forcibly and the second performance character is not made to appear.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special game that is valuable to a player when a predetermined symbol is variably displayed on a symbol display device and then confirmed and displayed, and the confirmed and displayed symbol is a predetermined symbol. About.

  Conventionally, game machines have been devised in various ways to improve their preferences. Above all, with the symbol display device provided on the game area, the display of whether or not the game value is given to the player is determined based on how the display method is devised, and the popularity and unpopularity of the gaming machine is determined. Therefore, various ideas are given especially. As a gaming machine having a representative game value giving display, for example, there is a so-called fever-type pachinko gaming machine, and this type of game has three symbol display parts for displaying special symbols on a special symbol display device, and is started. Based on the winning award winning prize, each symbol display section displays a fluctuating display as a spurious image that shows the state of the rotation of the symbols, characters, numbers, symbols, characters, etc. as special symbols. The display is stopped and the stopped special symbols are matched.

  As a result of the above variable display, if the stop symbol of each symbol display part is a combination of a normal symbol set in advance (normal bonus symbol), the gaming state is changed to a special game (normal bonus game) that is valuable to the player. In addition, if the stop symbol of each symbol display part is a combination of specific symbols that are determined in advance (specific bonus game), the gaming state is shifted to a special game (specific jackpot game) that is extremely valuable to the player. It has come to be.

  However, such a conventional pachinko gaming machine has the following problems. In other words, conventional pachinko machines have fewer technical interventions related to the game than the rotary machines represented by slot machines, so the player feels unsatisfactory in terms of game play. There was a point. In other words, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, once a player operates a launching device with a predetermined force, and launches a pachinko ball to a desired position in the game area, it is displayed on the symbol display device thereafter. There was no technical intervention related to the game, and it was forced to play a very boring game just by watching the change of the symbol (special symbol etc.).

  Therefore, in order to solve such problems, in recent years, a selection button that can be operated by a player is provided on a pachinko gaming machine, for example, until the symbol displayed on the symbol display device starts to fluctuate until it stops. A technique has been proposed in which a selection screen is displayed when a so-called reach state is reached, and a player operates a selection button to select one of a plurality of subsequent variation displays (for example, see Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-008309

However, in a gaming machine equipped with such an operation means such as a selection button, even if the player operates the operation means, the variable display is not started immediately on the symbol display device, that is, the symbol display. The variable display is resumed by the apparatus after the effective time of operation of the operation means has elapsed. Therefore, even after operating the operating means, the player cannot see the subsequent variable display on the symbol display device until the effective time has elapsed, and during this time the player spends a boring time. There was a problem that the interest of gaming decreased.

  In addition, although one can be selected from a plurality of variation displays, substantially one variation pattern set in advance is expressed as two different images (two different characters). Therefore, there is a problem in that the player's sense of technical intervention is not improved so much and the player still feels unsatisfactory in terms of game play. .

  Furthermore, even when the player does not operate the operation means, it is highly likely that an effect equivalent to that obtained when the player operates will be obtained. Therefore, even if the player does not operate the operation means, the game is not greatly affected. As a result, there is a problem that the value of the operation means is extremely lowered, and the significance of the existence of the operation means itself is diluted.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve at least one of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player. The purpose is to further improve the sense of technical intervention and to increase the value of the operating means.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes, as described in claim 1, a game ball detecting means for detecting winning or passing of a game ball, and the game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means. Based on detection of winning or passing, main control means for transmitting a predetermined display command signal, and receiving the display command signal transmitted from the main control means, variably displaying symbols on the symbol display device A gaming machine comprising: display control means; and special game generation means for generating a special game advantageous to a player when the symbol that the display control means confirms and displays on the symbol display device is a specific symbol An operation means operable by the player, and an operation signal input means for inputting an operation signal from the operation means. The operation means includes an operation trigger for the operation means on the symbol display device. Predetermined image A valid time for validating the player's operation is set on the basis of the fact that is displayed, the operation means is valid only when operated during the valid time, and the display control means When the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal during the time, a variation that quickly displays the symbol in a predetermined variation pattern on the symbol display device without waiting for the effective time to elapse. A pattern display means is provided.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of the variation patterns are provided so as to produce different effects, and the variation pattern display means is configured such that the operation signal input means is operated by the operation signal. It is characterized by comprising a variation pattern selecting means for selecting any variation pattern from among the plurality of variation patterns based on the input of a signal.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein a plurality of the variation patterns are provided so as to have different effects. The variation pattern selecting means includes the operation signal input means. When an operation signal is input, there is provided a variation pattern law selection means for selecting a variation pattern of a predetermined performance effect from among a plurality of variation patterns having different performance effects based on a predetermined law or selecting with a high probability It is characterized by.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine of the third aspect, the variation pattern law selecting means is the elapsed time of the valid time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. Is shorter than a predetermined time, a variation pattern having a high effect is selected or selected with a high probability.

Further, the gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or claim 4,
When the variation pattern law selection means selects the variation pattern with a high probability, the operation signal input means is executed by a predetermined random number process based on the timing when the operation signal is input.

  The gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time. If not, a variation pattern forced selection means for forcibly selecting a variation pattern with a low effect is provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the display control means is based on the fact that the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. In addition, the character display means is provided for displaying the effect character in a predetermined manner on the symbol display device in parallel with the symbol variation display.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to claim 8, in the gaming machine according to claim 7, a plurality of the effect characters are provided so that the effects are different, and the character display means is configured such that the operation signal input means is the operation signal. Character selection means is provided for selecting any effect character from the plurality of effect characters based on the input of.

  A gaming machine according to claim 9 is the gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein a plurality of the effect characters are provided so that the effect is different, and the operation signal input means is operated by the operation signal input means. Character signal selection means for selecting a production character having a predetermined production effect from among a plurality of production characters having different production effects based on a predetermined law when a signal is input or selecting with high probability And

  Further, in the gaming machine according to claim 10, in the gaming machine according to claim 9, the character rule selecting means is configured such that the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. When the time is shorter than a predetermined time, a production character having a high production effect is selected or selected with a high probability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to claim 11, in the gaming machine according to claim 9 or claim 10, when the character law selecting means selects the effect character with high probability, the operation signal input means Is executed by predetermined random number processing based on the timing at which the operation signal is input.

  A gaming machine according to claim 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time. If not, character forced selection means for forcibly selecting an effect character with a low effect is provided.

  A gaming machine according to claim 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time. If not, character forced appearance stopping means for forcibly making the production character appear is provided.

A gaming machine according to claim 14 is provided with a game ball detecting means for detecting winning or passing of a game ball, and a predetermined display based on detection of winning or passing of the game ball by the gaming ball detecting means. The main control means for transmitting the command signal, and the display command signal transmitted from the main control means is received, thereby displaying a plurality of digits on the symbol display device in a variable manner, and the plurality of digits for the variable display. The display control means for stopping the symbols in a predetermined order and confirming and displaying them on any one of the symbols, the losing symbols or the jackpot symbols, and the symbols that the display control means has confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device are the jackpot symbols. A special game generating means for generating a special game that is advantageous to the player, wherein the display control means does not reach the symbol display device and the symbol display or large In the case of confirming and displaying any one of the symbols, the above-mentioned multiple-digit symbols are changed to the reach state, the variation pattern introductory part, and the change pattern main parts having different effects while maintaining the reach state. A division screen that displays a division variation pattern that fluctuates in the order of a selection screen for selecting any of a plurality of chemical images formed by the variation pattern main portion group in which the data gathered, and a variation pattern main portion to be shifted to the final confirmed display A variation pattern display means, an operation means capable of selecting and operating any of the chemical images when the player displays the selection screen, an operation signal input means for inputting an operation signal from the operation means, Based on the timing at which the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal corresponding to any one of the chemical images by the operating means, the variation pattern main part group corresponding to the chemical image selected by the player Variation pattern main part selection means for selecting any of the fluctuation pattern main parts from the above, and the operation means validates the player's operation while the selection screen is displayed on the symbol display device An effective time is set, and the operation means is effective only when operated during the effective time, and the display control means, when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal during the effective time, It is characterized by comprising a fluctuation pattern main part display means for fluctuating and displaying the plurality of digits in the fluctuation pattern main part selected on the symbol display device without waiting for the effective time to elapse. To do.

  A gaming machine according to claim 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the operation signal input means is provided in the display control means. .

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, for example, a game ball detection means such as a proximity sensor detects a winning or passing of a game ball at a start winning opening or an operation gate provided in a game area, and the game ball detection means Based on detection of winning or passing, the main control means transmits a predetermined display command signal. This main control means is a device composed of a microcomputer or the like and mainly controls various circuits and devices provided in the gaming machine. The display control means receives the display command signal transmitted from this main control means. By doing so, the symbols are variably displayed on a symbol display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix LED display device.

  Here, examples of the predetermined display command signal transmitted from the main control means to the display control means include control signals such as a strobe signal for recognizing the command signal and a command signal for display control. When the display control means confirms and displays the symbol on the symbol display device is a specific symbol, for example, a predetermined number symbol “777” or the like, the special game generating means is advantageous to the player. A special game is generated. As a special game, for example, in a so-called first type pachinko game machine, a game that opens a big winning opening as a big hit game in a predetermined manner, a game that opens an electric accessory as a hit game for a predetermined time, etc. It corresponds to. The specific design also includes a 1-digit, 2-digit, or 4-digit or more numeric design.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation signal input means for inputting an operation signal from the operation means, and when the player operates the operation means, The operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means. Thus, the operating means is set with an effective time for enabling the player's operation based on the display of a predetermined screen that triggers the operation of the operating means on the symbol display device. Therefore, the operating means is only effective when operated during this effective time. For example, as the predetermined screen, a screen that prompts the player to operate the operation means is displayed on the symbol display device, and a time during which the predetermined screen is displayed is set as an effective time. In other words, in this case, the display time of the predetermined screen and the effective time of the operation means are synchronized, and the operation of the operation means of the player is
Only when a predetermined screen is displayed on the symbol display device, the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means.

  When the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means during this effective time, the fluctuation pattern display means variably displays the symbols displayed on the symbol display device in a predetermined fluctuation pattern. Here, when an operation signal is input, the variation pattern display means promptly displays the variation pattern on the symbol display device without waiting for the effective time to elapse. In other words, in the present invention, it is not necessary for the player to wait for the effective time of the operation means to elapse after operating the operation means, and the display of the symbol variation is promptly started on the symbol display device. If the symbol confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device is a specific symbol, the special game generating means generates a special game advantageous to the player.

Note that the time when a predetermined screen that triggers the player to operate the operating means is displayed on the symbol display device may be before the start of symbol variation display or during the variation (for example, reach state).
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, the player does not need to wait for the effective time of the operation means to elapse after operating the operation means, and can enjoy the game without stress. become. That is, it is possible to provide a player with speedy game development by omitting wasted time, and as a result, the game taste is improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game by operating the operation means, and the player's feeling of technical intervention is improved.

  Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a plurality of variation patterns are provided so as to have different effects, and the variation pattern display means includes variation pattern selection means. The fluctuation pattern selection means selects any fluctuation pattern from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the operation signal input means inputting the operation signal. That is, when the player operates the operation means, any variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns with different effects, and the variation display of the symbol by the selected variation pattern of the effect is symbol display. It will be displayed on the device. Accordingly, in the invention of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 1, the player operates the operating means to select from among a plurality of different variation patterns of effects related to the generation of a special game advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to participate in the actually displayed variation pattern, the existence significance of the operation means is increased, and the technical intervention feeling of the player is further improved. In addition, the player can enjoy different variation patterns of various effects, and as a result, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein a plurality of variation patterns are provided so as to have different effects, and the variation pattern selection means includes a variation pattern law selection means. When the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal, the variation pattern law selection means selects a variation pattern of a predetermined effect effect from a plurality of variation patterns having different effect effects based on a predetermined rule or higher Select by probability. In other words, when the player operates the operation means, one of the change patterns is selected from a plurality of change patterns having different effects. At this time, the change pattern law selection means is based on a predetermined law. For example, a variation pattern having a high or low effect is selected or selected with a high probability. Then, the symbol variation display based on the selected variation pattern of the effect is displayed on the symbol display device.

Therefore, in the invention of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 2, the player can enjoy different variation patterns of various production effects, for example, when a variation pattern having a high production effect is displayed. This time, the player is more likely to enjoy a special game advantageous to the player (increased reliability) and can enjoy the game with great expectations, that is, increase the value of the fluctuation pattern, , The gameability of the gaming machine is improved. In addition, he came to devise the operation of the operation means while thinking about trying to find a law property that displays a variation pattern with a high production effect. As a result, the interest of the game further increased and the value of the operation means increased. . Furthermore, when the player finds this rule, he can get great joy and tries to operate the operating means based on this rule, so the player's sense of technical intervention and willingness to play are extremely increased. To do.

  Here, various predetermined rules can be considered, but the following is preferable. That is, the gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the variation pattern rule selecting means is defined in advance as the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. If the time is shorter than the selected time, a variation pattern having a high effect is selected or selected with a high probability. That is, if the time until the player operates the operating means is short, the probability that a variation pattern with a high effect is displayed or displayed is high. In this way, the player can find this rule relatively easily. Therefore, in the invention of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 3, the player's sense of technical intervention and willingness to play Will increase.

  Further, when the variation pattern law selection means selects the variation pattern with high probability, the following is preferable. In other words, the gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or claim 4, wherein the variation pattern law selection means selects a variation pattern having a high performance effect or a predetermined performance effect with a high probability. Is performed by predetermined random number processing based on the timing at which the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal.

  Here, the predetermined random number processing means that, for example, a loop counter that generates a random number of 0 to 999 as a random number for determining a variation pattern is created in a storage area such as a microcomputer, and each of a plurality of variation patterns is assigned to 0 to 999. The random number is set in correspondence with the random number, and one random number is extracted from the random numbers from 0 to 999 based on a predetermined timing (in the present invention, the timing at which the operation signal is input), and is set to the extracted random number. Therefore, when selecting a variation pattern having a predetermined rendering effect (high rendering effect) with a high probability, many random numbers have (( It is only necessary to set a variation pattern (high production effect). That is, in this case, each of the plurality of variation patterns including the variation pattern of the predetermined effect (high effect effect) is set to a predetermined probability and the actually displayed variation pattern Uniformity and irregularity are ensured with respect to the selection of. Therefore, in the invention of claim 5, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 3 or claim 4, based on the operation timing of the operation means of the player, a variation pattern of a predetermined effect (high effect) is Since it can be displayed with a predetermined probability while maintaining the appearance and irregularity, the game machine's preference is greatly improved, and the game machine development designer can make a game machine with high preference very easily Can be developed and designed.

  By the way, whether or not the operating means is operated depends on the player's will, and some players may not operate the operating means. In such a case, the following is preferable. That is, in the gaming machine according to claim 6, in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5, the operation signal input means did not input the operation signal from the operation means during the effective time. In this case, the variation pattern forced selection means forcibly selects a variation pattern with a low effect. Therefore, according to the invention of claim 6, in addition to the effect of any of the inventions of claims 3 to 5, when the player does not operate the operation means, a variation pattern with a low effect is displayed. That the player has a feeling that there is a great influence on the game, that is, the player will not be able to generate a special game advantageous to the player this time by displaying a variation pattern with a low production effect. The premonition increases (decrease in reliability) and the game cannot be enjoyed with expectation, and the player takes the initiative to operate the operation means. As a result, the value of the operation means is greatly enhanced. The significance of its existence becomes obvious, and the player's sense of technical intervention is further improved.

  A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects, wherein the display control means includes a character display means, and the character display means receives an operation signal input. Based on the input of the operation signal by the means, the effect character is displayed on the symbol display device in a predetermined manner in parallel with the symbol variation display. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the symbols displayed on the symbol display device are variably displayed in a predetermined variation pattern, and at the same time, the effect character is displayed in a predetermined manner.

  Therefore, according to the invention of claim 7, in addition to the effects of any one of the inventions of claims 1 to 6, the player displays a variation pattern related to the occurrence of a special game advantageous to the player on the symbol display device. When an effect character appears at the time of display, it is possible to enjoy a variation pattern with excellent effect as a result, and this time, a premonition that a special game advantageous to the player will increase (increased reliability). In addition, the game can be enjoyed with great expectation, that is, the taste of the game is further improved, the presence of the operation means is further enhanced, and the sense of technical intervention of the player is further improved.

  Further, the gaming machine according to claim 8 is the gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein a plurality of effect characters are provided so that the effects are different, and the character display means includes a character selection means. The means selects any effect character from the plurality of effect characters based on the operation signal input means inputting the operation signal. In other words, when the player operates the operation means, any effect character is selected from among the effect characters having different effects, and the effect character of the selected effect is displayed in parallel with the variation pattern. It will be displayed on the device. Therefore, in the invention of claim 8, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 7, the player operates the operation means to perform a plurality of effects in parallel with the variation pattern related to the occurrence of a special game advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to participate in an effect character that is actually displayed from among the effect characters that are different from each other, so that the presence of the operation means is increased, and the technical intervention feeling of the player is further improved. Further, the player can enjoy various performance characters with various performances, and as a result, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to claim 9, in the gaming machine according to claim 8, a plurality of effect characters are provided so as to have different effect effects, and the character selection means includes character law selection means. When the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal, the character law selection means selects an effect character having a predetermined effect from a plurality of effect characters having different effect effects based on a predetermined law, or selects with a high probability To do. That is, when the player operates the operation means, any effect character is selected from among the effect characters having different effect effects. At this time, the character rule selection means is based on a predetermined rule, For example, an effect character with a high or low effect is selected or selected with a high probability. Then, the selected effect character of the effect is displayed on the symbol display device in parallel with the variation pattern.

  Therefore, in the invention of claim 9, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 8, the player can enjoy various performance characters with various performance effects. For example, when a performance character with a high performance effect is displayed. This time, the player is more likely to enjoy a special game advantageous to the player (increased reliability) and can enjoy the game with great expectations, that is, the value of the production character is increased, and as a result , The gameability of the gaming machine is improved. In addition, in order to find out the law of displaying performance characters with high performance effects, he began to devise the operation of the operation means while thinking, and as a result, the interest of the game further increased and the value of the operation means increased . Furthermore, when the player finds this rule, he can get great joy and tries to operate the operating means based on this rule, so the player's sense of technical intervention and willingness to play are extremely increased. To do.

  Here, various predetermined rules can be considered, but the following is preferable. That is, the gaming machine according to claim 10 is the gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the character rule selecting means is defined in advance as the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. If it is shorter than the time, a production character having a high production effect is selected or selected with a high probability. That is, if the time until the player operates the operation means is short, the effect character with a high effect is displayed or is likely to be displayed. In this way, the player can find this rule relatively easily. Therefore, in the invention of claim 10, in addition to the effect of the invention of claim 9, the player's sense of technical intervention and willingness to play Will increase.

  In addition, when the character law selection means selects a production character with a high probability, the following is preferable. That is, the gaming machine according to claim 11 is the gaming machine according to claim 9 or claim 10, wherein the character law selection means selects a predetermined performance effect or a performance character having a high performance effect with a high probability. Is executed by predetermined random number processing based on the timing at which the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. Here, the predetermined random number processing is as described in claim 5 above. Therefore, in this case, each of the plurality of effect characters including the effect character having a predetermined effect effect (high effect effect) The probability of selection is set to a predetermined probability, and uniformity and irregularity are ensured with respect to the selection of the actually displayed effect character. Therefore, in the invention of claim 11, in addition to the effects of the invention of claim 9 or claim 10, an effect character having a predetermined effect (high effect) is obtained based on the operation timing of the operation means of the player. Since it can be displayed with a predetermined probability while maintaining the appearance and irregularity, the game machine's preference is greatly improved, and the game machine development designer can make a game machine with high preference very easily Can be developed and designed.

  By the way, whether or not the operating means is operated depends on the player's will, and some players may not operate the operating means. In such a case, the following is preferable. That is, the gaming machine according to claim 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the operation signal input means does not input an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time. In this case, the character forced selection means forcibly selects a performance character with a low performance effect. Therefore, according to the twelfth aspect of the present invention, in addition to the effects of any of the ninth to eleventh aspects of the invention, when the player does not operate the operation means, the effect character having a low effect is displayed. That the player has a feeling that there is a great influence on the game, that is, the player will not be able to generate a special game that is advantageous to the player this time by displaying a performance character with a low performance effect. The premonition increases (decrease in reliability) and the game cannot be enjoyed with expectation, and the player takes the initiative to operate the operation means. As a result, the value of the operation means is greatly enhanced. The significance of its existence becomes obvious, and the player's sense of technical intervention is further improved.

  Alternatively, when the player does not operate the operation means, the following may be used instead of the invention of claim 12. That is, the gaming machine according to claim 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the operation signal input means does not input an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time. In this case, the forced character appearance stop means forcibly prevents the effect character from appearing. Even if it does in this way, there exists an effect similar to the effect of the invention of Claim 12 mentioned above.

The invention of claim 14 is based on the fact that, as in the invention of claim 1, the winning or passing of the game ball is detected by the gaming ball detecting means, and the gaming ball detecting means detects the winning or passing of the game ball. The main control means transmits a predetermined display command signal. Then, the display control means receives the display command signal transmitted from the main control means, thereby displaying the multiple-digit symbols in a variable manner on the symbol display device and also displaying the variable-digit symbols in the variable display. After stopping in a predetermined order, the display is fixedly displayed on any of the lost symbols, reach-removed symbols or jackpot symbols. When the symbol that the display control means has determined and displayed on the symbol display device is a jackpot symbol, the special game generating means generates a special game advantageous to the player.

  Here, the jackpot symbol is a predetermined specific symbol, for example, when the three-digit symbol is variably displayed, it is a numerical symbol “777” or the like of the complex pattern. When fluctuating and controlling the 3-digit left middle right design, first stop the 1st digit left design, then stop the 3rd digit right design, and finally stop the 2nd digit middle design. In this case, both the left symbol of the first digit and the right symbol of the third digit are stopped, and only the middle symbol of the second digit is not stopped, that is, only the middle symbol of the second digit is still displayed in a variable manner. The first symbol left symbol and the third symbol right symbol that are already stopped match the jackpot symbol (this is called reach), and then the second digit middle symbol stopped Does not match the jackpot symbol, for example, a numerical symbol such as "787" The handle, the other, a combination of symbols other than the big hit symbol and reach failure symbol.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when either the out-of-reach symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device, the divided variation pattern display means first displays the symbols of a plurality of digits at the beginning of the variation pattern. Transition to the reach state, and then, on the selection screen, a plurality of morphological images formed by a variation pattern main part group in which a plurality of variation pattern main parts having different effects are gathered until the reach state is maintained. Finally, the fluctuation pattern main part displays any one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts having different effect effects, executes the fluctuation, and shifts to the final confirmation display. Specific examples of the chemical image include images of various modes (scenes) such as “forest” and “sea”, and there is no specification of a still image or a moving image.

  Thus, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes an operating means that allows a player to select and operate a morphological image formed by any of the variation pattern main groups when a selection screen is displayed. The operation signal input means for inputting the operation signal and the operation signal input means correspond to the chemical image selected by the player based on the timing at which the operation signal corresponding to any of the chemical images by the operation means is input. And a variation pattern main part selection means for selecting one of the fluctuation pattern main parts from the fluctuation pattern main part group, and the player operates the operation means to select one of the fluctuation pattern main part groups. Thus, the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal from the operation means, thereby recognizing the body image selected by the player, that is, the variation pattern main part group. Then, when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal from the operation means, that is, when the variation pattern main part group selected by the player is recognized, the operation signal input means causes any one of the phantom images by the operation means. Based on the timing when the operation signal corresponding to is input, the fluctuation pattern main part selecting means constitutes a fluctuation pattern main part group corresponding to the ghost image selected by the player. One of the fluctuation pattern main parts is selected from the above.

  Here, while the selection screen is displayed on the symbol display device, the operation means is set to an effective time during which the player's operation is valid. Valid only when operated. Then, when the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time, the fluctuation pattern main part is selected by the fluctuation pattern main part display means for displaying a multiple-digit symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device. Fluctuation display at. Here, when the operation signal is input, the fluctuation pattern main part display means promptly displays the fluctuation pattern main part on the symbol display device without waiting for the effective time to elapse. That is, in the present invention, there is no need to wait for the effective time of the operation means to elapse after the player operates the operation means, and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern main part is immediately started on the symbol display device. When the multi-digit symbols that are confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device via the variable display of the pattern main part are jackpot symbols, the special game generating means generates a special game advantageous to the player.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the fourteenth aspect of the present invention, the player does not need to wait for the effective time of the operation means to elapse after operating the operation means, and can enjoy the game without stress. become. That is, it is possible to provide a player with speedy game development by omitting wasted time, and as a result, the game taste is improved. In addition, when a reach-removed symbol or a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed as a symbol combination on the symbol display device, a split variation pattern is displayed, that is, a special advantage advantageous to the player that has a great influence on the player's profit. An interesting divisional variation pattern is displayed in the scene of whether or not a game can be acquired, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, in the divided variation pattern, the player can select one of a plurality of variation pattern main part groups by operating the operation means, so that the player can participate in the game. Based on the operation timing of the operation means by the player, a variation pattern for actually executing the variation is selected from a plurality of variation pattern main portions having different rendering effects. Along with being able to enjoy the main part, the sense of technical intervention in the game will be greatly improved, and the significance of the operation means will be enhanced. Further, for example, when a variation pattern main part having a high effect is displayed on the symbol display device, the player is more likely to have a special game advantageous to the player this time (increased reliability). The game can be enjoyed with great expectation, that is, the value of the variation pattern is increased, and as a result, the gameability of the gaming machine is improved and the player's willingness to play is increased.

  According to a fifteenth aspect of the present invention, in any one of the first to fourteenth aspects, the operation signal input means is provided in the display control means. That is, in the present invention, the operation signal input means is provided not in the main control means but in the display control means. Therefore, according to the invention of claim 15, in addition to the effect of the invention of any one of claims 1 to 14, the storage device of the main control means for mainly controlling various circuits and devices provided in the gaming machine. By rewriting the contents, it is possible to avoid input to the main control means that illegally generate a big hit, and as a result, the anti-fraud function of the gaming machine is improved, and there is no unexpected disadvantage to the amusement hall .

It is a front view showing game machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a front view which shows the special symbol display apparatus 6 of this embodiment. It is a principal part block diagram of the game machine control apparatus 100 of this embodiment. 3 is a schematic block diagram illustrating a relationship between a main control circuit 44 and a display control circuit 111 according to the present embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a list figure of the random number handled in the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the operation gate passage process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding LED lighting control processing which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the random value of the off symbol determination counter C10 of this embodiment, and a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning opening release process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the hold LED extinction control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize winning process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding LED lighting control processing which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the random number value of each of the left stop symbol determination counter C2, the middle stop symbol determination counter C3, the right stop symbol determination counter C4, and the big hit symbol determination counter C7 of this embodiment and each special symbol. . The process of creating the special symbol of the present embodiment based on the random numbers of the left stop symbol determination counter C2, the middle stop symbol determination counter C3, the right stop symbol determination counter C4, and the big hit symbol determination counter C7 is shown. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation display process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing of the transmission data which the display control circuit 111 transmitted from the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment and controls the special symbol display apparatus 6 receives. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the hold LED extinction control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a distribution pattern of the fluctuation pattern in the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation pattern 21, the fluctuation pattern 22, the fluctuation pattern 31, the fluctuation pattern 32, and the fluctuation pattern 4 as a collective fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 51 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is the front view of the special symbol display apparatus 6 showing the selection screen in the fluctuation pattern 51 and the fluctuation pattern 52 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 52 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is the front view of the special symbol display apparatus 6 showing the selection screen in the fluctuation pattern 61 and the fluctuation pattern 62 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 61 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 62 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display main control process which the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment performs. It is a list figure of the random number handled in the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern display process which the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern main part selection process which the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment performs. 40A is a timing chart from the start to stop of the change of the divided change pattern of this embodiment, and FIG. 40B is the operation time of the determination button 51 of this embodiment, the change pattern main part, and the second effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the extraction of a character, and the appearance rate of a 2nd production character. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the 1st effect character and 2nd effect character of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each division | segmentation fluctuation pattern 51,52,61,62 and the 1st effect character determination counter C11 in the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 51, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 1 (forest). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 51 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14. Pattern main part group 2 (sea)). FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 52, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 3 (forest). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 52 and the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 4 (sea)). FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 61 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14. Pattern main part group 5 (soccer). Explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the division | segmentation fluctuation pattern 61 in the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment, the counter C12 for 2nd effect character determination, the counter C13 for 2nd effect character appearance, and the counter C14 for change pattern main part determination (change) Pattern main group 6 (baseball)). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the divided variation pattern 61, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main group 7 (kendo)). FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 62, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 8 (soccer). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 62 and the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main group 9 (baseball)). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 62 and the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main group 10 (kendo)).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
1 is an overall front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a front view of a special symbol display device 6, and FIG. 3 is a principal block diagram of a gaming machine control device 100 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram showing the relationship between the main control circuit 44 and the display control circuit 111 constituting the gaming machine control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 22 fixed to a game island (not shown) and an inner frame 23 attached to the outer frame 22. The game board 21 that provides the player with a pachinko game, the hitting operation handle 2 that operates the hitting ball launching device 43 to be described later when operated by the player, and the game ball launched by the hitting ball launching device 43 are guided. A striking ball guide rail 3 to be played, a game region forming rail 4 provided so that the launched game ball flies within a certain range, a game region 5 surrounded by the striking ball guiding rail 3 and the game region forming rail 4, A liquid crystal display that performs a pseudo display (hereinafter also referred to as a scroll display) showing a state in which a special symbol is rotated, and a windmill 20 that changes a game ball launched into the game area 5 in an unexpected direction. A special symbol display device 6 constituted by (LCD) or the like, a start winning opening (electric tulip) 11 for causing the special symbol display device 6 to start a variable symbol display (scroll display) when a game ball wins, When the special symbol display device 6 displays the variation of the special symbol and the game ball wins the start winning opening 11 (hereinafter, such a game ball is also referred to as a holding ball), after the variation display is finished, Four hold LEDs 25 (25a, 25b, 25c, 25d, see FIG. 2) for sequentially displaying the turn-on display of the hold memory for informing the player of whether to change the number of times (up to four times) and the special symbol display device 6 A display unit 30 for displaying a predetermined image, a left symbol display unit 8, a middle symbol display unit 9, a right symbol display unit 10 for individually displaying three special symbols on the display unit 30, and a special symbol display unit 10. When the display result on the handle display device 6 is in a predetermined mode (big hit), a large winning opening (attacker) 7 that is advantageously opened to the player and a game ball for supplying the game ball to the ball hitting device 43 The striking ball supply tray 12, the surplus ball receiving tray 13 that can store the balls that cannot fit in the striking ball supply tray 12, and can move the game balls to a storage ball box (not shown), and the striking ball supply tray 12 2 and a push type determination button 51 for determining the position of the cross switch 50 and the pointer 52 for moving the arrow pointer 52 shown in FIG. A normal winning port 14 for paying out a prize ball, a game effect lamp 15 for notifying a prize ball for payout, a ball jam, and an abnormality, and a game ball provided at the bottom of the game area 5 When the out symbol 16 is collected, the glass door frame 17 is provided so as to be freely opened and closed, and a single-digit normal symbol is displayed, and the normal symbol is a predetermined normal symbol (winning), the start winning port 11 A normal symbol display device 18 composed of a 7-segment LED or the like that opens the blades of the electric tulip, and a normal symbol operation gate 19 that causes the normal symbol display device 18 to start displaying a variation of the normal symbol when the game ball passes. When the normal symbol display device 18 displays the variation of the normal symbol and the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate 19 (hereinafter, such a game ball is also referred to as a pass-holding ball), the variation display is finished. Later, four on-hold LEDs 26 (26a, 26b, 26c, 26d, etc.) for sequentially displaying the on-hold memory for informing the player of how many times the variable display is to be performed (up to four times). It is constituted by two reference) and.

  In the gaming machine 1 configured as described above, first, a game ball is launched from the hit ball launching device 43 by the operation of the hitting operation handle 2 of the player, and passes between the hit ball guiding rail 3 and the game area forming rail 4. A game ball is launched into the game area 5 on the game board 21. Then, the game ball falls in the game area 5 due to its own weight, and in the process of falling, the game ball is changed in the direction of dropping by a game nail or windmill 20 (not shown) implanted in the game board 21, In the case where the normal winning opening 14 is won, the normal symbol operating gate 19 is passed, or all the winning holes are not won, the winning hole 16 is collected.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening 11, a predetermined prize ball is given to the player, and the game ball is detected by a start winning detection sensor 116 described later, and each symbol display unit 8 of the special symbol display device 6 is detected. , 9, 10 are scroll-displayed, and after a predetermined time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol display unit 8, the right symbol display unit 10, and the middle symbol display unit 9, and the left symbol display unit 8 When the special symbol of the right symbol display unit 10 stops and the special symbol combination that constitutes the big hit (for example, the special symbol of the left symbol display unit 8 and the special symbol of the right symbol display unit 10 are the same) Special symbol combination), reach is reached, and a predetermined reach action is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6, and then the special symbol of the middle symbol display unit 9 is stopped. Sure If the displayed special symbol is a combination of predetermined special symbols, it will be a big hit, and the attacker as the big prize opening 7 will be opened in a predetermined manner. In some cases, it will be off. In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the process of variably displaying the special symbol on the special symbol display device 6, when a predetermined gaming state is reached, for example, when reaching a reach, the player is given a specific ratio. The design variation pattern can be selected by moving the pointer 52 to a desired position using the cross switch 50 and pressing the decision button 51.

  Further, when the game ball wins the normal winning opening 14, a predetermined prize ball is given to the player. When the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate 19, the game ball is detected by an operation gate detection sensor 121, which will be described later, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 18, and a lottery is performed to confirm the display. When the normal symbol is a normal symbol determined in advance, it is a win and the blades of the start winning opening (electric tulip) 11 are opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the gaming machine control device 100 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming machine control device 100 is configured as shown in FIG. 3, and the main control circuit 44 mainly constituting the gaming machine control device 100 includes an input circuit 101, an output circuit 110, a one-chip microcomputer 27, and a bus connecting them. 115 (data bus, address bus, control bus, etc.), and the one-chip microcomputer 27 is connected to the output circuit 110 on the basis of signals from the sensors and switches acquired via the input circuit 101. A predetermined control program for controlling various circuits and devices is executed. The one-chip microcomputer 27 includes a CPU 102 that executes a control program, a ROM 103 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 102, and a RAM 104 that temporarily stores data processed by the CPU 102.

  When the winning of the game ball provided in the start winning opening 11 is detected in the input circuit 101, a start winning detection sensor 116 that sends a special symbol variation start signal (hereinafter also referred to as a start signal), and the start winning opening 11 is won. A count switch 123 that detects a game ball, an operation gate detection sensor 121 that sends a normal symbol variation start signal (hereinafter also referred to as an operation signal) when the passage of a game ball provided in the normal symbol operation gate 19 is detected, and a grand prize A count switch 117 that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the grand prize opening 7 by opening the mouth 7, a continuous prize switch 118 that detects a game ball that has passed through a specific area of the big prize opening 7, and a ball-handling operation handle 2 The ball hitting operation handle switch 119 that is turned on when the ball is turned and a game ball is fired, and a pressing operation provided at a predetermined position of the hitting ball operation handle 2 In order to turn off the operation of the hitting ball launching device 43 to stop the launching of the game ball, and to count the game balls won in each winning opening as safe balls and to pay out the game balls as prizes A safe sphere detection sensor 122 that outputs a necessary safe signal is connected.

The output circuit 110 includes a lamp control circuit 37 that controls lighting / flashing of LEDs (for example, the hold LED 25 and the hold LED 26) and various display lamps (for example, the game effect lamp 15) provided on the game board surface, and a grand prize. A solenoid 106 for opening the attacker as the mouth 7, a solenoid 107 for opening the electric tulip as the start winning opening 11, and a voice for performing voice control for amplifying various sound effects from the speaker 113. The control circuit 38 is connected to an external information terminal 109 connected to a hall management computer or the like (not shown).

  Furthermore, the payout control circuit 40 and the display control circuit 111 are connected to the output circuit 110. The payout control circuit 40 includes a payout control CPU (not shown), a RAM having a storage area for storing the work area of the payout control CPU, the number of prize balls corresponding to each prize ball command, and the like. And a ROM in which control data, a control program for paying out a prize ball, and the like are stored. The payout control circuit 40 drives and controls the prize ball payout device 41 according to the prize ball command instructed from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44, and performs prize ball payout control. In addition, the payout control circuit 40 is connected to a hitting ball launching device 43 for emitting a pachinko ball toward the game area 5 via the launching control circuit 42. And control.

  Next, the display control circuit 111 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the display control circuit 111 includes a CPU 140 that executes a display control program therein, a ROM 142 that stores a display control program executed by the CPU 140, and a RAM 141 that is built in the CPU 140 that forms a work area of the CPU 140. ing. The display control circuit 111 stores VDP 143 that controls an image displayed on the special symbol display device 6 as an LCD, display control data (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to each command read by the VDP 143, and characters, symbols, backgrounds, etc. A VRAM 144 having a storage area for temporarily storing and holding the image data processed by the CGROM 145 and the VDP 143 for the image data is provided.

  That is, the display control circuit 111 receives a control signal such as a one-way strobe signal or a display control command signal from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44 via an input circuit (not shown). The control CPU 140 recognizes the display control command. Then, the VDP 143 reads display control data and characters, symbols, backgrounds, and the like from the data area corresponding to the display control command from the CGROM 145 and stores them in the VRAM 144 that temporarily stores the image data. The VDP 143 reads the stored image data from the VRAM 144 when the display order is reached, and displays the image data on the LCD (special symbol display device 6) in a predetermined manner in response to a command from the CPU 140.

  The display control circuit 111 is connected with a cross switch 50 and an enter button 51 as operation means via an input circuit (not shown), and a pointer 52 is displayed on the LCD (special symbol) corresponding to the player's operation of the cross switch 50. The movement is displayed on the display device 6), and the predetermined variation pattern is variably displayed on the LCD (special symbol display device 6) as described above in response to the pressing operation of the determination button 51 by the player.

  The display control circuit 111 includes a RAM and a VRAM backup 146 that can retain the stored contents of the RAM 141 and the VRAM 144 even when the power is turned off. Further, the CPU 140 is connected to the CPU 140 via a driver circuit (not shown). Thus, a normal symbol display device 18 as a 7-segment LED is connected. The main control circuit 44 has a RAM backup 130 circuit that can retain the stored contents of the RAM 104 even when the power is turned off, similar to the display control circuit 111. Further, the main control circuit 44 is externally connected to the main control circuit 44. A test terminal for testing the contents of 44, such as a connector, is also provided.

Thus, if the RAM 104 of the main control circuit 44 and the RAM 141 and VRAM 144 of the display control circuit 111 have a backup function capable of retaining stored contents even when the power is turned off, for example, lightning occurs nearby. Even if the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is suddenly cut off due to a surge current entering the gaming machine 1 or the like, the RAM 104 of the main control circuit 44, the RAM 141 of the display control circuit 111, and the VRAM 144 are related to the game. Since all the data is preserved, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored, the game can be resumed from the previous gaming state, and the game arcade can provide a fair game to the player, while the player can, for example, Even if the power is cut off in an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to continue the advantageous gaming state after the power is restored, so there is an unexpected disadvantage Avoidance can, a marked effect for both. In addition to the RAM 104 of the main control circuit 44 and the RAM 141 and VRAM 144 of the display control circuit 111, this backup function is also provided in the RAM of other control circuits such as the RAM of the payout control circuit 40 that controls the payout of the prize balls. May be. Further, the above-described RAM 141 may not be built in the CPU 140 and may be external to the CPU 140.

  Further, the control signal (strobe signal, command signal, etc.) is unidirectionally communicated from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, that is, by eliminating the input from the display control circuit 111 to the main control circuit 44. In addition, by inputting the input of the operation means (cross switch 50 and determination button 51) directly to the display control circuit 111 without passing through the main control circuit 44, the main control circuit governing the main control of the gaming machine 1 as a whole. The number of inputs to 44 can be reduced, and illegal signal inputs to the main control circuit 44 can be eliminated as much as possible. The game arcade can provide appropriate games to the player, and the circuit configuration and program related to communication between the two can be simplified. It is easy to develop and produce the gaming machine 1 and has the remarkable effect of reducing the cost. Note that the one-way communication from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44 is not limited to the display control circuit 111 as shown in FIG. 3 but also to other control circuits such as the payout control circuit 40 for paying out the prize balls. To do.

  The normal symbol display device 18 connected to the display control circuit 111 may be directly connected to the output circuit 110 of the main control circuit 44, or the lamp control circuit directly connected to the output circuit 110 of the main control circuit 44. 37 and the audio control circuit 38 may be connected to the display control circuit 111 or the payout control circuit 40. Furthermore, the hitting operation handle switch 119 and the hitting operation stop switch 120 connected to the input circuit 101 may be directly connected to the launch control circuit 42 or the payout control circuit 40. These may be appropriately designed according to the functions and arrangement of various devices constituting the gaming machine control device 100, the processing speed of each CPU, the capacity of a storage device such as ROM, RAM, and the like.

  In the gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the gaming machine control device 100 performs overall control of the gaming machine 1 by executing the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIG. Various images corresponding thereto are displayed on the special symbol display device 6 or the like. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a main game process (main routine) executed by the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44. Immediately after the power is turned on, the CPU 102 performs initialization processing (step S10), and initializes flags, registers, and storage areas necessary for stack setting and the following processing. When the CPU 102 finishes the initialization process in step S10, the process proceeds to the random number update process in step S20. The CPU 102 executes a main routine (each program stored in the ROM 103 of the main control circuit 44), that is, each process of Step S20 to Step S60 described below, every reset interrupt (4 msec).

FIG. 6 is a list of random numbers handled by the main control circuit 44. In the main control circuit 44, as shown in FIG. 6, various counters C1 to C10 (random numbers 1 to 10) are set as random numbers for setting the game mode at random. CPU102 updates the value regarding each counter C1-C10 by the random number update process of step S20. The jackpot determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314) is a random number counter that draws whether or not a special symbol combination is a jackpot (details will be described later. ) And starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C1 becomes 315, it is rewritten to 0.

  Random number counter for determining the stop symbol of a special symbol is a random number that creates an off symbol other than the jackpot symbol, which will be described later, as a special symbol combination (including a case where the symbol is disengaged after reaching reach; Counters for left stop symbol determination C2 (random numbers 2, 0 to 13), middle stop symbol determination counter C3 (random numbers 3, 0 to 13), right stop symbol determination counter C4 (random numbers 4, 0 to 13) 13) is provided.

  The left stop symbol determination counter C2 is a counter used to create a symbol for the left symbol, starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when the random number counter C2 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0. The middle stop symbol determination counter C3 is a counter used to create a middle symbol, starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) each time the left stop symbol determination counter C2 is set to zero. The However, when the random number counter C3 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0. The right stop symbol determination counter C4 is a counter used to create a right symbol design, and starts from 0 when the power is turned on. The However, when this random number counter C4 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent the left, middle and right symbols from being synchronized.

  The reach determination counter C5 (random numbers 5, 0 to 11) is a random number counter (to be described later in detail, the reach is 3 when the special symbol combination is used as an out-of-band design). The probability is 1/12), which starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when the random number counter C5 becomes 12, it is rewritten to 0.

  The reach symbol mode determination counter C6 (random numbers 6, 0 to 62) displays the special symbol that the middle symbol display unit 9 stops when the combination of special symbols is out of reach, the left symbol display unit 8 and the right symbol display It is assumed that the same special symbol that the unit 10 stops is plus or minus 1 (which will be described later, in this embodiment, each special symbol displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 is For example, when the special symbol stopped in the left symbol display unit 8 and the right symbol display unit 10 is 3, the special symbol that the middle symbol display unit 9 stops is displayed. 4 (plus 1) or 2 (minus 1), hereinafter, a random number counter (to be described in detail later) for determining whether or not such a special symbol that the middle symbol display unit 9 stops is also referred to as plus or minus 1 symbol) But Reach out if the plus or minus 1 pattern of to 19, a probability 20/63), starting from power-on 0, is incremented (1 is added) to each reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C6 becomes 63, it is rewritten to 0.

  The jackpot symbol determination counter C7 (random numbers 7, 0 to 13) is a random number counter that creates a jackpot symbol as a combination of special symbols. The counter is started from 0 when the power is turned on and is incremented every reset interrupt (4 msec) (1 Added). However, when the random number counter C7 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0.

  The variation pattern determining counter C8 (random numbers 8, 0 to 51) is a random number counter for lottery of which variation pattern is adopted as the above reach action when the combination of special symbols is a big hit or the reach is lost. Starting from 0 when the power is turned on, it is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C8 becomes 52, it is rewritten to 0.

  The hit determination counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30) is a random number counter that draws a lottery to determine whether or not to win a normal symbol (which will be described in detail later. ) And starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C9 becomes 31, it is rewritten to 0.

  The off symbol determining counter C10 (random numbers 10, 0 to 8) is a counter used for creating a normal symbol off symbol, starting from 0 when the power is turned on, and incrementing (adding 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). Is done. However, when the random number counter C10 becomes 9, it is rewritten to 0.

  Returning to FIG. 5, when the CPU 102 finishes the random number update process in step S <b> 20, the CPU 102 proceeds to the normal game process in step S <b> 30. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the normal game process (step S30). The normal game process is composed of the operation gate passing process in step S450 and the normal symbol game process in S500. First, the operation gate passing process in step S450 will be described.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation gate passing process. When the operation gate passage process is started, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol operation gate 19 is detected (operation signal input to the operation gate detection sensor 121) (step S452). If a game ball has not been detected (NO in step S452), the operation gate passing process is terminated and the routine proceeds to the normal symbol game process (FIG. 10) in S500. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected (YES in step S452), CPU 102 proceeds to the process in step S454 and determines whether the value of counter A is less than 5. The counter A is a counter set in the main control circuit 44 to store the number of reserved memories (the number of retained balls passed) of the hold LED 26 (see FIG. 2), and the operation gate detection sensor 121 is a normal symbol operation gate 19. When a game ball passing through is detected, the minimum value is changed from 0 to a maximum value of 5. When the power is turned on, the value is initialized and a minimum value of 0 is set.

  If NO in step S454, that is, if the counter A is a value of 5 or more, the CPU 102 ends the operation gate passing process. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S454, that is, if the counter A has a value of 0 to 4, the process proceeds to the process of step S456, and the CPU 102 increments the value of the counter A (add 1) based on the operation signal described above. Then, the process proceeds to step S458 to execute a random number acquisition process. When the CPU 102 proceeds to the random number acquisition process in step S458, the CPU 102 acquires the current values of the counters C9 and C10 described above and stores them in the acquired numerical value storage areas of the RAM 104, respectively. When the random number acquisition process in step S458 ends, the CPU 102 proceeds to the hold LED lighting control process in step S464.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the hold LED lighting control process (step S464). When the hold LED lighting control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines in the process of step S466 whether or not the value of the counter A is 2 or more (NO in step S466), that is, When the value of the counter A is 0 or 1, the hold LED lighting control process is terminated. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S466, that is, if the value of the counter A is 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S468, and the CPU 102 has four hold LEDs 26a, 26b, 26c, and 26d (see FIG. 2), the lamp control circuit 37 is driven to light up, and the hold LED lighting control process is terminated.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol game process (step S500). CP
When this normal symbol game process is executed, U102 first determines whether or not the value of counter A is 1 or more in the process of step S501, and if not (1 in step S501), that is, the counter If the value of A is 0, the normal symbol game process is terminated and the process proceeds to the process of step S40 of the main game process (FIG. 5). On the other hand, when the value of the counter A is 1 or more in the process of step S501 (YES in step S501), the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S502 and sets a value in the hit flag F4.

  The main control circuit 44 is set with a hit flag F4, and the hit flag F4 is set to 0 when the power is turned on. Then, in the random number acquisition process of step S458 described above, when the acquired numerical value of the counter for counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30) is 0 to 9, the CPU 102 sets 1 to the hit flag F4. If the acquired numerical value of the counter for counter C9 is not 0 to 9, that is, 10 to 30, the hit flag F4 remains 0. Therefore, the hit probability in this case is 10/31, and the probability of loss is 20/31. When the CPU 102 completes the process of setting the hit flag F4 in step S502, the CPU 102 proceeds to a normal symbol determination process in step S503.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the random number value of the off symbol determination counter C10 (0 to 8) and the normal symbol (one-digit normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 composed of 7-segment LEDs). FIG. When the CPU 102 proceeds to the normal symbol determination process in step S503, the CPU 102 determines the normal symbol that is fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display device 18. If 1 is set in the winning flag F4 (if it is a winning), the CPU 102 determines the number symbol “7” as the winning symbol. On the other hand, if 0 is set in the hit flag F4, an off symbol (for example, “2” if C10 = 2) corresponding to the acquired numerical value of the off symbol determining counter C10 (0 to 8) shown in FIG. The normal symbol determination process in step S503 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the normal symbol control process in step S504.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol control process (step S504). When this normal symbol control process is executed, the CPU 102 first executes a normal symbol variation display process in the process of step S506. In the normal symbol variation display process of step S506, in order to display the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process of step S503 described above on the normal symbol display device 18 after the variable display, the CPU 102 Output transmission data.

  That is, this transmission data is output from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, and from the start of fluctuation of the single-digit normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 composed of 7-segment LEDs. It is defined that two commands are transmitted as display control commands before the confirmation display. For these two commands, the normal symbol designating command for designating the normal symbol change start and the normal symbol stop design is sent first, and then the normal symbol stop designating command for designating the normal design stop is used for the above normal symbol designating. It is configured to be transmitted when time t has elapsed since the command was transmitted. Therefore, this time t is the normal symbol change time, that is, the time from when the normal symbol starts changing to the normal symbol display device 18 until it stops. The normal symbol variation time t is set to 30 seconds at normal times.

  Ten types of normal symbol designation commands are prepared corresponding to the normal symbols (0 to 9), and a stop symbol (determined symbol) is designated. One type of the normal symbol stop designation command is prepared, and the normal symbol stop timing is instructed. The normal symbol designation command and the normal symbol stop designation command described above are transmitted from the main control circuit 44 and received by the display control circuit 111, so that the normal symbol starts to fluctuate and is displayed after being stopped. The fluctuation display of the times is normally displayed by the symbol display device 18.

  When the normal symbol variation display process of step S506 is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S508, and determines whether or not the above-described normal symbol variation time t is up (t = 0). If NO in step S508, that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol variation time t has not timed up, the CPU 102 ends the normal symbol control process (step S504) and performs the process in step S512. Migrate to On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S508, that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol variation time t has timed up, the process proceeds to the normal symbol fixed display process of step S510.

  When the process proceeds to step S510, the CPU 102 executes a process of confirming and displaying the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process of step S503 on the normal symbol display device 18 as described above. Then, when the process of step S510 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the normal symbol control process and proceeds to the process of step S512.

  When the process proceeds to step S512, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display device 18, and if it is not fixedly displayed (NO in step S512), the normal symbol is displayed. The symbol game process (step S500) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S512 that the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 (YES in step S512), the CPU 102 proceeds to the process in step S514. It is determined whether or not the value of flag F4 is 1, and if it is 1 (YES in step S514), the process proceeds to step S516, and the start winning opening releasing process is executed.

  In step S516, the CPU 102 executes a start winning opening opening process shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning opening opening process (step S516). When this start winning opening opening process is executed, the CPU 102 first controls the solenoid 107 to open the blades of the starting winning opening (electric tulip) 11 in the process of step S518. Then, the process proceeds to step S520, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the set start winning opening opening time ST is up (ST = 0). Accordingly, this time ST is the opening time of the start winning opening, that is, the time from when the starting winning opening 11 opens the blade until it closes. The start winning opening opening time ST is normally set to 0.2 seconds. If NO in step S520, that is, if it is determined that the start winning opening release time ST has not timed up, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S522 and the value of the counter G is 6 or more. It is determined whether or not.

  This counter G counts the main control circuit 44 in order to count the number of game balls won in the start winning opening 11 until the opened winning opening 11 is closed after the start winning opening 11 elapses. Is counted up when the count switch 123 detects a game ball, and is initialized and set to 0 when the power is turned on.

  If NO in step S522, that is, if the value of the counter G is determined to be less than 6, the start winning opening releasing process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S528. On the other hand, when it is determined YES in the process of step S520 or the process of step S522, that is, when it is determined that the start winning opening opening time ST has expired or when the value of the counter G is determined to be 6 or more, In step S524, the CPU 102 drives and controls the solenoid 107 to close the blades of the start winning port 11. Then, the process proceeds to step S525, and the CPU 102 sets the value of the counter G to 0, proceeds to the process in step S526, sets the value of the winning flag F4 to 0, and this start winning opening releasing process. (Step S516) is ended, and the process proceeds to Step S528.

  When the process proceeds to step S528, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning flag F4 is 0, that is, whether or not all predetermined start winning opening opening processing (step S516) is completed, and the value of the winning flag F4 is determined. Is not 0 (NO in step S528), that is, in the case of 1, it is determined that all the predetermined start winning opening opening processing has not ended, and this normal symbol game processing (step S500) is ended. On the other hand, when the value of winning flag F4 is 0 (YES in step S528), CPU 102 determines that all the predetermined start winning port opening processes have been completed, and proceeds to the process of step S530. On the other hand, if the value of the hit flag F4 is not 1 in the process of step S514 (NO in step S514), that is, if the value of the hit flag F4 is 0, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S530. . After shifting to the process of step S530, the CPU 102 decrements (decrements 1) the value of the counter A incremented (added by 1) in the process of step S456 (FIG. 8) described above, and shifts to the process of step S532. The hold LED extinguishing control process is executed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the hold LED extinguishing control process (step S532). When the hold LED extinguishing control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter A is 1 or more in the process of step S534. If the value of the counter A is not 1 or more (in step S534) NO), that is, if the value of the counter A is 0, the hold LED extinguishing control process is terminated, the normal symbol game process (step S500) is terminated, and the process of step S40 of the main game process (FIG. 5) Migrate to On the other hand, if YES in step S534, that is, if the value of the counter A is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S536, and the CPU 102 selects one of the four hold LEDs 26a, 26b, 26c, and 26d. The corresponding one is driven to turn off the lamp control circuit 37, and the hold LED turn-off control process is finished.

  Returning to FIG. 5, when the normal game process (step S30) is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S40 and executes the special game process. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special game process. The special game process includes a start winning opening winning process in step S300 and a special symbol game process in step S318. First, the starting winning opening winning process in step S300 will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning opening winning process. When the start winning award winning process is started, the CPU 102 determines whether or not a game ball won in the start winning award 11 is detected (start signal input from the start winning detection sensor 116) (step S302). If no game ball has been detected (NO in step S302), the start winning opening winning process is terminated and the process proceeds to a special game process in step S318. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected (YES in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304 to determine whether the value of counter B is less than 5. This counter B is the same as the counter A described above, and is a counter set in the main control circuit 44 to store the number of reserved memories (the number of held balls) of the hold LED 25, and the start winning detection sensor 116 is started. When a game ball that has won a prize opening 11 is detected, the game ball changes from a minimum value 0 to a maximum value 5, and is initialized and a minimum value 0 is set when the power is turned on.

If NO in step S304, that is, if the counter B has a value of 5 or more, the start winning opening winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S304, that is, if the counter B has a value of 0 to 4, the process proceeds to the process of step S306, and the CPU 102 increments the value of the counter B based on the start signal described above (add 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S308 to execute a random number acquisition process. When the CPU 102 proceeds to the random number acquisition process in step S308, the CPU 102 acquires the current values of the counters C1, C5, C6, and C8 from the counters C1 to C10 described above and stores them in the acquired numerical value storage area of the RAM 104, respectively. When the random number acquisition process in step S308 ends, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S312 and executes a hold LED lighting control process.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the hold LED lighting control process (step S312). When the hold LED lighting control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter B is 2 or more in the process of step S314. If it is not 2 or more (NO in step S314), that is, When the value of the counter B is 0 or 1, the hold LED lighting control process is terminated and the special symbol game process of step S318 is executed. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S314, that is, if the value of the counter B is 2 or more, the process proceeds to the process of step S316, and the CPU 102 selects one of the four hold LEDs 25a, 25b, 25c, and 25d. The corresponding one is driven to light up by driving the lamp control circuit 37, and the hold LED lighting control process (step S312) is ended.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game process (step S318). When this special symbol game process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter B is 1 or more in the process of step S319. If the value of the counter B is not 1 or more (in step S319) NO), that is, if the value of the counter B is 0, the special symbol game process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the process of step S50 of the main game process (FIG. 5). On the other hand, if the value of counter B is 1 or more in the process of step S319 (YES in step S319), the process proceeds to step S344, and CPU 102 sets a value for each flag.

  Here, as the flags, a big hit flag F1, a reach flag F2 and a reach mode flag F3 are set in the main control circuit 44, and these flags are set to 0 when the power is turned on. In the random number acquisition process in step S308 described above, if the acquired numerical value (hereinafter, simply referred to as “value”) of the jackpot determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314) is 7, the jackpot 1 is set in the flag F1. Note that if the acquired value of the big hit determination counter C1 is not 7, that is, 0 to 6 and 8 to 314, the big hit flag F1 remains 0. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot probability is 1/315, and the probability of loss is 314/315.

  Further, in the random number acquisition process of step S308 described above, if the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 (random numbers 5, 0 to 11) is 3, the reach flag F2 is set to 1. It should be noted that the reach flag F2 remains 0 when the obtained value of the reach determination counter C5 is not 3, that is, 0-2 and 4-11. Therefore, in this case, the probability of detachment of reach is 1/12, and the probability of detachment of non-reach is 11/12.

  Further, in the random number acquisition process of step S308 described above, when the acquired numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 (random numbers 6, 0 to 62) is 0 to 19, 1 is set to the reach mode flag F3. In addition, when the acquisition numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 is 20 to 62, the reach mode flag F3 remains 0. Accordingly, in this case, the probability of reach divergence in which the middle symbol display unit 9 becomes plus / minus one symbol is 20/63, and the probability of reach divergence in which the middle symbol display unit 9 is other than plus / minus one symbol is 43/63. When the CPU 102 completes the process of setting each flag in step S344, the CPU 102 proceeds to the special symbol determination process in step S346.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process (step S346). When the special symbol determination process is executed, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0 in step S347. If the value of the big hit flag F1 is not 0 (NO in step S347), that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 1, the process proceeds to step S353 and is created in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104. Corresponding jackpot symbol data is acquired from the jackpot symbol storage buffer in which the jackpot symbol data is stored.

  20 and 21, a left stop symbol determination counter C2 (random numbers 2, 0 to 13), a middle stop symbol determination counter C3 (random numbers 3, 0 to 13), and a right stop symbol determination counter A special symbol (left symbol display unit 8, middle symbol display unit) as an off symbol or jackpot symbol based on the random number values of C4 (random numbers 4, 0 to 13) and jackpot symbol determination counter C7 (random numbers 7, 0 to 13) 9. A case where each special symbol displayed on the right symbol display unit 10 is created will be described. 20 and 21 show the relationship between the random numbers of the stop symbol determination counters C2, C3, C4 and the jackpot symbol determination counter C7 and the special symbols, and the special symbols are the stop symbol determination counters C2, C3, C4 and It is explanatory drawing which shows the process produced based on the random value of the big hit symbol determination counter C7. First, with reference to FIGS. 20A, 20 </ b> B, 20 </ b> C, and 21 </ b> A, a case where a special symbol combination (including a reach deviation) is created as a special symbol combination will be described.

  The left stop symbol determination counter C2 (random numbers 2, 0 to 13), the middle stop symbol determination counter C3 (random numbers 3, 0 to 13) and the right stop symbol determination counter C4 (random numbers 4, 0 to 13) are respectively As shown in FIGS. 20A, 20B, and 20C, the special symbols 1 to 14 correspond to the random numbers 0 to 13, and are counted up as described in the random number update process in step S20. However, since the process of continuing to update during the remaining time of the main game process is performed by the random number update process of step S60 shown in FIG. 5 described in detail later, each random value is a random value every 4 msec. As a result, each special symbol corresponding to the random value is also created as random data every 4 msec.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21A, the data of each special symbol created to be displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 every 4 msec is stored in the RAM 104. Are stored in a predetermined symbol storage buffer created in the storage area. Here, as the special symbol combination, when the data of the reach out of which the middle symbol display unit 9 becomes plus or minus 1 symbol is created, the reach symbol storing buffer of plus or minus 1 symbol is used as the special symbol combination, When the data of the reach out of which the middle symbol display unit 9 is other than the plus / minus 1 symbol is created, the data of the out of the reach which does not become the reach as the combination of the special symbol is stored in the reach symbol storing buffer other than the plus / minus 1 symbol. When created, each of them is stored in the errant symbol storage buffer that does not become reach, and when the jackpot symbol data shown in FIG. 20 (D) is created as a special symbol combination. , Not to be remembered. In FIG. 21 (A), “1, 2, 1” is a combination of special symbols that are out of reach where the middle symbol display unit 9 becomes plus or minus one symbol, and the middle symbol display unit 9 is other than plus or minus one symbol. As an example, “5, 8, 5” is shown as a combination of the special symbols that are not reachable, and “5, 5, 1” is shown as a combination of the special symbols that are not reach.

  Next, the case where a big hit symbol is created as a combination of special symbols will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (D) and 21 (B). The jackpot symbol determination counter C7 (random numbers 7, 0 to 13) is, as shown in FIG. 20D, jackpot symbols “1, 1, 1” to “14, 14 and 14 ”, and is counted up as described in the random number update process in step S20. The main number is updated by the random number update process in step S60 shown in FIG. Since the process continues to be updated during the remaining time of the game process, the random value takes a random value every 4 msec. As a result, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the random value is also created as random data every 4 msec. .

As shown in FIG. 21B, the jackpot symbol data created to be displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 every 4 msec is stored in a predetermined memory of the RAM 104. The jackpot symbol storage buffer created in the area is stored while being rewritten. In FIG. 21B, the jackpot symbol “5, 5, 5” as a special symbol combination is shown.
"Is shown as an example. In addition, as will be described in detail later, among the jackpot symbols, the odd-numbered numbered symbols (“1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7, 7, 7”, “9” , 9, 9 ”,“ 11, 11, 11 ”,“ 13, 13, 13 ”) is a specific big symbol, and the other even-numbered numbers (“ 2, 2, 2 ”,“ 4, 4, 4 ”) ”“ 6, 6, 6 ”,“ 8, 8, 8 ”,“ 10, 10, 10 ”,“ 12, 12, 12 ”,“ 14, 14, 14 ”) is usually a big bonus symbol. A bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus symbol is usually given.

  Returning to FIG. 19, that is, in the process of step S353, if the big hit flag F1 is set to 1 (in the case of big hit), the CPU 102 reads out the big hit symbol data stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer and reads it out. The jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol data is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104.

  On the other hand, if YES in step S347, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, the process proceeds to step S348, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach flag F2 is 0. If the value of reach flag F2 is 0 (YES in step S348), the process proceeds to step S349, and CPU 102 reads out the missed symbol data stored in the missed symbol storage buffer that does not become reach. The outlier corresponding to the read out outlier symbol data is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S348, that is, if the value of the reach flag F2 is 1, the process proceeds to step S350, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach state flag F3 is 0. If the value of reach state flag F3 is 0 (YES in step S350), the process proceeds to step S351, and CPU 102 loses the data stored in the reach symbol storage buffer other than plus or minus 1 symbols. The symbol data is read out, and a reach out symbol other than the plus or minus 1 symbol corresponding to the read out symbol data is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, and predetermined memory of the RAM 104 is stored. Remember in the area.

  On the other hand, if the value of reach mode flag F3 is not 0 (NO in step S350), that is, if the value of reach mode flag F3 is 1, the process proceeds to step S352, and CPU 102 determines whether plus or minus 1 symbol. Is read out and stored in the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 at this time is stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. The symbol is determined and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104.

When any of steps S349, S351, S352, and S353 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol determination process (step S346), and proceeds to the special symbol control process of step S354. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process (step S354). When this special symbol control process is executed, CPU 102 executes a special symbol variation display process shown in FIG. 23 in step S356.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation display processing (step S356). When the special symbol variation display process is executed, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0 in step S358. If the value of the big hit flag F1 is not 0 (NO in step S358), that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 1, the process proceeds to step S359, and the CPU 102 performs the special symbol determination process described above. (Step S3
In step S353 of 46), it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol data acquired from the jackpot symbol storage buffer is the above-described odd numbered number symbol, that is, whether or not it is a specific bonus symbol.

  If YES in step S359, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is the specific bonus symbol, the process proceeds to step S360, and the CPU 102 changes the variation pattern 4, the variation pattern 22, the variation pattern 32, A process for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display any one of the fluctuation patterns 52 and 62 is executed. On the other hand, if NO in the process of step S359, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is not a specific bonus symbol (when it is a normal bonus symbol as the above-mentioned even-numbered symbol), step S361 is performed. Shifting to the processing, the CPU 102 executes processing for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display any variation pattern from among the variation pattern 22, the variation pattern 32, the variation pattern 52, and the variation pattern 62.

  On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S358, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, the process proceeds to step S362, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach flag F2 is 0. If the value of the reach flag F2 is 0 (YES in step S362), that is, the symbol data acquired this time is stored so that it does not become reach in step S349 of the special symbol determination process (step S346) described above. If it is out-of-order symbol data acquired from the buffer, the process proceeds to step S363, and the CPU 102 executes processing for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display the variation pattern 1.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S362, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F2 is 1, the process proceeds to step S364, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach state flag F3 is zero. If the value of reach state flag F3 is 0 (YES in step S364), that is, the symbol data acquired this time is other than plus or minus one symbol in step S351 of the special symbol determination process (step S346) described above. If the reach symbol data obtained from the reach symbol storage buffer is obtained, the process proceeds to step S365, and the CPU 102 performs processing for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display the variation pattern 21 or the variation pattern 31. Execute.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S364, that is, if the value of the reach state flag F3 is 1, that is, the symbol data acquired this time is plus or minus 1 in step S352 of the special symbol determination process (step S346) described above. If the reach reach symbol data acquired from the symbol reach symbol storage buffer step is reached, the process proceeds to step S366, and the CPU 102 determines whether the variation pattern 21, the variation pattern 31, the variation pattern 51, or the variation pattern 61 is within the range. From this, a process for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display one of the variation patterns is executed.

  As will be described in detail later, in the processing of step S360, step S361, step S365, and step S366, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns in the random number acquisition processing in step S308. The variation pattern determination counter C8 (random number 8, 0 to 51) is determined.

When the processing of step S360, step S361, step S365, or step S366 is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S367 and executes the LED / lamp lighting control processing. In this LED / lamp lighting control process (step S367), the CPU 102 drives the above-described lamp control circuit 37 to turn on or blink the LED, lamp, etc. provided on the game board surface in a predetermined manner. Execute. By this processing, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol display device 6 has displayed the variation pattern related to the big hit or the reach, and it is possible to improve the performance level of the game.

  When the LED / lamp lighting control process in step S367 or the process for instructing the display of the fluctuation pattern 1 in step S363 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol fluctuation display process (step S356) and proceeds to the process in step S369. Transition.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation display displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 by the display control circuit 111 that has received a variation pattern display instruction from the main control circuit 44 will be described. . FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of transmitted data as a change pattern display instruction transmitted from the main control circuit 44 and received by the display control circuit 111 that controls the special symbol display device 6. The main control circuit 44 uses the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation display process in step S356 for the special symbol (stop symbol) determined in the special symbol determination processing in step S346 to the left of the special symbol display device 6. The transmission data shown in FIG. 24 is output for a fixed display after variable display (scroll display) on the symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10.

  This transmission data is output from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, and is confirmed from the start of fluctuation of the special symbols displayed by the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 of the special symbol display device 6. Until then, it is specified that five commands are transmitted as display control commands. As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, these five commands are first transmitted with a variation pattern designation command, then with a left special symbol designation command, and subsequently with a right special symbol designation command, A medium special symbol designation command and all symbol stop designation commands are transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the five special commands are transmitted when the time T1 elapses after the first variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the left special symbol designation command is The right special symbol designation command is transmitted when the time T2 has elapsed since the transmission, and the middle special symbol designation command is transmitted when the time T3 has elapsed since the right special symbol designation command has been transmitted. The all symbol stop designation command is transmitted when the time T has elapsed after the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. Therefore, this time T is a special symbol variation time, that is, a time from when the special symbol (the left special symbol, the middle special symbol, and the right special symbol) starts to fluctuate on the special symbol display device 6 until it stops. The special symbol variation time T is normally set to 7 to 42 seconds (13 to 42 seconds for a big hit or reach, and 7 seconds for others).

  The variation pattern designation command transmitted first includes the value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 (random numbers 8, 0 to 51) acquired in the random number acquisition process in step S308 and the flags (big hit flag F1, reach flag). F2 and reach mode flag F3) are sent based on the current values of fluctuation pattern 1, fluctuation pattern 21, fluctuation pattern 22, fluctuation pattern 31, fluctuation pattern 32, fluctuation pattern 4, fluctuation pattern 51 as described above. 10 types of variation pattern 52, variation pattern 61 and variation pattern 62 are prepared, and the variation state (variation pattern and variation time) of all symbols is indicated. When this is transmitted, the variation of the special symbol is started. The contents of these ten types of variation patterns will be described in detail later.

There are 14 types of left special symbol designation commands corresponding to the left special symbols 1 to 14 shown in FIG. 12, and the stop symbol (determined symbol) in the left column is instructed. There are 14 types of right special symbol designating commands corresponding to the right special symbols 1 to 14 shown in FIG. 12, and the stop symbol (determined symbol) in the right column is instructed. There are 14 types of medium special symbol designation commands corresponding to 1 to 14 of the medium special symbols shown in FIG. 12, and the stop symbol (determined symbol) in the middle row is instructed. One type of all symbol stop designation commands is prepared, and the stop timing of special symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column is instructed. The above variation pattern designation command, left special symbol designation command, right special symbol designation command, middle special symbol designation command and all symbol stop designation command are transmitted from the main control circuit 44 and received by the display control circuit 111. One change display from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed after being stopped is displayed by each of the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 of the special symbol display device 6.

  That is, the special symbol change display (scroll display) displayed on the special symbol display device 6 has different times until the respective symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 stop changing, Sometimes, each symbol display unit 8, 9, 10 is performed simultaneously. When the fluctuation is stopped, the left symbol display unit 8 is first stopped, then the right symbol display unit 10 is stopped, and finally the middle symbol display unit 9 is It comes to stop. When the left symbol display unit 8 and then the right symbol display unit 10 are stopped based on the variation pattern related to the big hit or the reach, when a reach that has the same special symbol appears, the special symbol display device 6 On the display unit 30, various effects (reach actions) that make the player entertained are performed using the characters stored in the CGROM 145 of the display control circuit 111.

  In addition, the aspect until each symbol display part 8,9,10 stops from a fluctuation | variation start may be other than above, and various aspects can be considered. For example, a time difference may be provided when each of the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 starts changing, or may be stopped simultaneously when each of the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 stops changing. Furthermore, the order in which the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 start changing may be changed, or the order in which the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 stop changing may be changed. In addition, such various modes may be mixed so that the player is notified that the result of the variation display will be a big hit or reach. If it does in this way, according to the aspect from a change start to a stop, a player can assume what kind of result this change display will become, gameability will improve, and a player's willingness to play will increase.

  In addition, the special symbol stop means not only the state where it is completely stopped, but also a state where, for example, several frames are slightly moved up and down on each of the symbol display portions 8, 9, 10 (hereinafter, this state is referred to as such). Also referred to as “shake”). That is, the special symbol may be stopped in any manner as long as the player can recognize the special symbol even if the special symbol is not completely stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 22, when the process proceeds to step S <b> 369, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time T (see FIG. 24) is up (T = 0). If NO in step S369, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation time T has not timed up, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol control process (step S354) and performs the process in step S374. Migrate to On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S369, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation time T has timed up, the process proceeds to the special symbol confirmation display process of step S370.

  When the process proceeds to the process of step S370, the CPU 102 executes a process of confirming and displaying the special symbol determined in the special symbol determination process of step S346 on the special symbol display device 6 as described above, and proceeds to the process of step S371. Then, the value of the reach flag F2 is set to 0, the process proceeds to step S372, and the value of the reach mode flag F3 is set to 0. In addition, when it determines with YES by the process of the said step S348 and step S362, and when it has determined with YES by the process of said step S350 and step S364, CPU102 performs the process of step S371 and step S372. , Do nothing. When the process of step S372 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol control process (step S354).

When the process proceeds to step S374, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the special symbol is fixedly displayed on the special symbol display device 6 here, and if it is not fixedly displayed (NO in step S374), the special symbol is displayed. The symbol game process (step S318) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S374 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 (YES in step S374), the process proceeds to step S380, and the CPU 102 receives the big hit here. It is determined whether or not the value of the flag F1 is 1. If NO in step S380, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S434. On the other hand, when the value of big hit flag F1 is 1 (YES in step S380), the process proceeds to step S381, and the process of canceling the probability change process is executed. Note that the probability change process cancellation process in step S381 is a process for canceling the process set in the probability change process in step S412 to be described later and returning it to the normal setting, and detailed description thereof is omitted here. In short, the hit determination counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30), the normal symbol variation time t, the start winning opening opening time ST, the big hit determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314), and In this process, each content of the special symbol variation time T is returned to the normal setting. Accordingly, when the probability changing process of step S412 described later is not executed, nothing is processed here. When the process of canceling the probability change process in step S381 is completed, the process proceeds to step S391, and the CPU 102 executes the jackpot process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the big hit process (step S391). When the jackpot process (step S391) is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the interval time is in the process of step S392. This interval time is the time during which the big winning opening (attacker) 7 provided during each round during the so-called jackpot game is closed. ) Ends the jackpot process (step S391) and proceeds to the process of step S410. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S392 that the interval time is not reached (NO in step S392), the process proceeds to step S394.

  In step S394, the CPU 102 controls the solenoid 106 to open the special winning opening 7. Then, the process proceeds to step S396, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the preset opening time 30 of the predetermined prize winning opening 7 has expired, and NO in the process of step S396, that is, If it is determined that the opening time 30 seconds of the big prize opening 7 has not expired, the process proceeds to step S398 to determine whether the value of the counter D is 10 or more. The counter D is a main control circuit 44 for counting the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 7 until the opened big prize opening 7 is closed after the opening time of the big prize opening 30 seconds elapses. Is counted up when the count switch 117 detects a game ball, and is initialized and set to 0 when the power is turned on.

  If NO in step S398, that is, if the value of the counter D is determined to be less than 10, the CPU 102 ends the jackpot process. On the other hand, if it is determined as YES in the process of step S396 or the process of step S398, that is, if it is determined that the opening time 30 seconds of the special winning opening 7 has expired, or the value of the counter D is determined to be 10 or more. If YES in step S400, the process advances to step S400, and the CPU 102 drives and controls the solenoid 106 to close the special winning opening 7. Then, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S401, sets the value of the counter D to 0, proceeds to the process of step S402, and increments (adds 1) the value of the counter E. This counter E is a counter set in the main control circuit 44 in order to count how many times the big winning opening 7 is opened, in other words, how many times each round in the big hit game is executed. Every time the process of step S400 is executed and the special winning opening 7 is closed, the count is incremented. When the power is turned on, it is initialized and 0 is set.

  When the process of step S402 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S404, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous winning switch 118 is turned on, that is, the game ball that has passed the specific area of the big winning opening 7. When it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area of the big winning opening 7 and the continuous winning switch 118 is turned on (YES in step S404), the CPU 102 performs the process of step S406. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter E is less than 16. In the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the number of times that the big winning opening 7 is opened, that is, whether or not the number of rounds in the big hit game has become 16 times. If YES in step S406, that is, if the value of the counter E is determined to be less than 16, the CPU 102 ends the jackpot process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined NO in the process of step S404 or the process of step S406, that is, when the continuous winning switch 118 is not turned on and the game ball does not pass the specific area of the big winning opening 7, or the counter E If it is determined that the value of 16 is greater than or equal to 16, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S407, sets the value of the counter E to 0, proceeds to the process of step S408, and sets the value of the big hit flag F1. Set to 0 to end the jackpot process.

  Returning to FIG. 18, when the process proceeds to step S410, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, that is, whether or not all of the predetermined big hit processes (step S391) are completed, and the big hit flag F1. If the value of the big hit flag is not 0 (NO in the process of step S410), that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 1, it is determined that all the predetermined big hit processes have not been completed, and this special symbol game process (step S318) is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of big hit flag F1 is 0 (YES in step S410), the process proceeds to step S411, and CPU 102 has an odd number of big hit symbols as in the above-described step S359 (FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not it is a number symbol of the second-order, that is, whether or not it is a specific big win symbol. If YES in step S411, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is a specific bonus symbol, the process proceeds to step S412 and the CPU 102 executes a probability change process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the probability changing process (step S412). When the probability changing process is started, the CPU 102 first changes the contents of the hit determination counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30) updated in the random number update process in step S20 described above in the process in step S414. Normally, the random number 9 created in the process of step S20 has a lottery probability that a normal symbol is a win, but is 10/31. To rise. This is done by changing 0 to 27 to random numbers instead of 0 to 9 among the random numbers composed of 0 to 30 described above.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S416, and the CPU 102 shortens the normal symbol variation time t used in step S508 of the above normal symbol control process (FIG. 12). Normally, the normal symbol variation time t is 30 seconds, but the normal symbol variation time t is shortened to 2 seconds by executing the probability variation process. That is, the variable display is started in step S506 of the above normal symbol control process (step S504), and the normal symbol variation display time is 30 seconds until the winning symbol or the off symbol is fixedly displayed in step S510. Is reduced to 2 seconds.

Next, the process proceeds to step S418, and the CPU 102 extends the start winning opening opening time ST used in step S520 of the above starting winning opening opening process (FIG. 13). Normally, the start winning opening opening time ST is 0.2 seconds, but the start winning opening opening time ST is extended to 2 seconds when the probability changing process is executed. That is, the opening time of the start winning port (electric tulip) 11 until the opening is closed in step S518 of the start winning port opening process (step S516) and closed in step S524 is 0.2 seconds. Extend to 2 seconds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S420, and the CPU 102 changes the contents of the jackpot determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314) updated in the random number update process in step S20 described above. Normally, the random number 1 created in the process of step S20 has a lottery probability that the special symbol combination is a big win, but it is 1/315. To 315. This is performed by changing 7, 33, 77, 111, and 222 to the big hit random numbers instead of the big hit random numbers consisting of 0 to 350 described above as the big hit random numbers.

  Next, proceeding to step S422, the CPU 102 shortens the special symbol variation time T used in step S369 of the special symbol control process (FIG. 22) described above. More specifically, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is shortened only when the reach is not reached (F1 = 0, F2 = 0). That is, in this embodiment, only the variation pattern 1 is shortened (see FIG. 23, step S363). Although the variation pattern 1 will be described later, the special symbol variation time T is normally set to 7 seconds (see FIG. 29), but is reduced to 2 seconds by executing the probability variation process. . In this way, the player can enjoy the change display of the special symbol that is a big hit and reach as usual while the probability change process is being executed, while the other, that is, the big win. For special symbols that are out of reach and reach, you can reduce the time required to display the boring variation display of special symbols that will be out of order by reducing the time required for the display to change. Impressing the player can give the player a sense of tension that the big hit is close. When the process of step S422 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the probability change process (step S412) and proceeds to the process of step S434.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S411, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is not the specific bonus symbol, the CPU 102 proceeds to the processing in step S434 and in the processing in step S306 described above (FIG. 16). The value of the counter B that has been incremented (added by 1) is decremented (subtracted by 1), the process proceeds to step S436, and the hold LED extinguishing control process is executed.

  As described above, if NO in step S411, that is, if the acquired jackpot symbol is not an odd jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol), the probability changing process in step S412 is not executed in the present embodiment. However, in this case, for example, the time-saving process having a lower profit for the player than the probability changing process may be performed. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is an even number jackpot symbol (usually a big bonus symbol) (NO in step S411), for example, a maximum of 100 special symbol game processes (step S318) are executed for a short time. As the process, a process that does not execute only the process of step S420 among the probability change processes may be set. Further, this may be adopted only when a big hit is made in the normal big symbol while the probability variation process is set. In this way, even if the normal bonus symbol is drawn, the time-saving process that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times, so that the player can win a big hit with the normal bonus symbol, for example. Even in such a case, it is possible to face the game without being overly discouraged, that is, it is possible to give the player an appropriate amount of joy, and as a result, the game performance is remarkably improved.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold LED extinguishing control process (step S436). When the hold LED extinguishing control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter B is 1 or more in the process of step S438, and if the value of the counter B is not 1 or more (in step S438) NO), that is, when the value of the counter B is 0, the hold LED extinguishing control process (step S436) is finished, and the process proceeds to the process of step S50 of the main game process (FIG. 5). On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S438, that is, if the value of the counter B is 1 or more, the process proceeds to the process of step S440, and the CPU 102 selects one of the four hold LEDs 25a, 25b, 25c, and 25d. The corresponding one is driven to turn off the lamp control circuit 37, and the hold LED turn-off control process is finished.

  Returning to FIG. 5, when the special game process (step S40) is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S50 and executes other processes. In addition, in the other processes of step S50, various processes other than the processes described above are executed. However, since these processes are not particularly related to the present invention, description thereof is omitted here. When the process of step S50 is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S60 and executes a random number update process. This performs a loop process that continuously updates the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 (see FIG. 6) in the random number update process in step S20 described above until the next reset interrupt occurs.

  Specifically, the CPU 102 executes each process of step S20 to step S60 every reset interrupt (4 msec), but the time required to execute these processes is not the same every time. Accordingly, the time of 4 msec for generating the reset interrupt needs to be set with a margin, and the remaining time still occurs when the CPU 102 completes the process of step S50. In step S60, the remaining time is used to update the values of the random number counters C1 to C10. For example, the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 are incremented (add 1) until the remaining time is consumed. Alternatively, a process of continuing to decrement (1 subtraction) is executed, or a process of continuously updating the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 by a predetermined mathematical formula is executed.

  In addition, without updating the values of the random number counters C1 to C10, a specific random number counter, for example, a big hit determination counter C1, a big hit symbol determination counter C7, or a big hit determination counter C9, which greatly increases the player's profit. Only the affected random number counter may be updated, and the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 may not be updated every reset interrupt (4 msec). May be performed every time one cycle occurs. In this way, program design is facilitated and processing operations of the CPU 102 and the like can be reduced. In this way, by updating the predetermined random number counter using the remaining time of the reset interrupt that is repeatedly executed every 4 msec of the main game process, the increment of the value of the predetermined random number counter in one process is irregular. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for an unfair strategy using a player's sensory device or the like, for example, a player's strategy to hit a big hit random number or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, the ten types of variation patterns related to the special symbol will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a distribution diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the main control circuit 44. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation pattern 21, the fluctuation pattern 22, the fluctuation pattern 31, the fluctuation pattern 32, and the fluctuation pattern 4 as a collective fluctuation pattern. 30 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern 51 as a divided variation pattern, FIG. 31 is a front view of the special symbol display device 6 showing a selection screen in the variation pattern 51 and the variation pattern 52 as a divided variation pattern, and FIG. 32 is a divided variation pattern. FIG. 33 is a front view of the special symbol display device 6 showing a selection screen for the variation pattern 61 and the variation pattern 62 as a divided variation pattern, and FIG. 34 is an illustration of the variation pattern 61 as a divided variation pattern. FIG. 35 and FIG. 35 explain the variation pattern 62 as the division variation pattern. It is.

As shown in FIG. 28, the ten types of variation patterns in the main control circuit 44 are roughly divided into a collective variation pattern and a divided variation pattern. The collective variation pattern is displayed on the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51 described above. On the other hand, the divided variation pattern is a variation pattern whose content is changed by the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51, and is step S349 of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 19). In this process, when a symbol that does not reach is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, it does not appear, that is, the divided variation pattern is displayed this time as a special symbol display. Appears at a predetermined probability only when a reach or jackpot symbol is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 6. It has become. First, the collective variation pattern will be described.

  There are six types of collective variation patterns: variation pattern 1, variation pattern 21, variation pattern 22, variation pattern 31, variation pattern 32, and variation pattern 4. First, variation pattern 1 is processed in step S349 (FIG. 19). This time is a collective variation pattern that is selected when a symbol that does not reach is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6, and as shown in FIG. 28, the random number acquisition process in step S308 (FIG. 16). The acquisition value of the jackpot determination counter C1 (random number 1, 0 to 314) acquired in step 0 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, but 0 when the probability change process is set in step S412) ~ 6, 8 ~ 32, 34 ~ 76, 78 ~ 110, 112 ~ 221, 223 ~ 314 and probability 62/63), reach determination cow Data C5 (random number 5, 0 to 11) is 0 to 2, 4 to 11 (probability 11/12), the big hit flag F1 = 0 and the reach flag F2 in the processing of FIG. 23 (step S358 and step S362) Only when = 0, the variation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern 1 is transmitted from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111 as described above in the process of step S363 (FIG. 23). As a result, the special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed. Therefore, when the variation pattern 1 is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it always becomes a missed symbol that is not reachable.

  The contents of the fluctuation pattern 1 are as shown in FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, the number of seconds after the fluctuation pattern represents the special symbol fluctuation time T, and is “high speed”, “medium speed”, “low speed”, “super high speed”. “Ultra-low speed” indicates the fluctuation speed when the special symbol is scrolled, and “Shake” means that the special symbol is not completely stopped as described above, and is slightly moving up and down a few frames. The total rotation means that all the special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 are synchronized. The ghost is a type of character displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6.

  In the same manner, the variation pattern 21 is a symbol other than a plus or minus one symbol that is not plus or minus one symbol as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S351 or step S352 (FIG. 19). Is a collective variation pattern selected when the out-of-reach symbol is determined, and the acquired value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, provided that the probability variation process is set to 0 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62/63), the obtained numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), for reach design mode determination The obtained numerical value of the counter C6 (random number 6, 0 to 62) is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), and the variation pattern determination counter C8 (random number 8, 0) 51) when the obtained numerical value is 0 to 24 (probability 25/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1 and the reach mode flag F3 = 1 (the processing of step S364), or the big hit determination counter C1 The obtained numerical value is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, but when the probability variation processing is set, 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62 / 63), the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), the acquisition numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 is 20 to 63 (probability 43/63), and the acquisition of the variation pattern determination counter C8 When the numerical value is 0 to 29 (probability 30/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1, and the reach mode flag F3 = 0, step S365 or step Process 366 are variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6 at (Figure 23). The contents of the variation pattern 21 are as shown in FIG.

  The variation pattern 22 is a collective variation pattern that is selected when a big hit symbol is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353 (FIG. 19), and is a big hit determination counter. The acquired value of C1 is 7 (probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), an odd jackpot symbol in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (specific big bonus symbol) Is stored (probability 1/2), the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 1 to 5 (probability 5/52), the big hit flag F1 = 1, or the big numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 ( Probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), even the big hit symbol storage buffer (usually big hit symbol) In the case of storage (probability 1/2), the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 0 to 5 (probability 6/52), and the big hit flag F1 = 1, in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23) The special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed. The contents of the variation pattern 22 are as shown in FIG.

  Similar to the variation pattern 21, the variation pattern 31 is a reach symbol other than a plus or minus one symbol as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 at this time in the process of step S 351 or step S 352. It is a collective variation pattern selected when the off symbol is determined, and the obtained numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, provided that the probability variation process is set to 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62/63), the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), and the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 The obtained numerical value is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), and the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 25 to 31 (probability 7). 52), when the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1 and the reach mode flag F3 = 1, or the obtained numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, where When setting the probability variation process, 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62/63), and the acquisition value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12) ), The acquired numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 is 20 to 63 (probability 43/63), the acquired numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 30 to 51 (probability 30/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach When the flag F2 = 1 and the reach mode flag F3 = 0, the special symbol display device 6 displays the variation in the process of step S365 or step S366 (FIG. 23).The contents of the variation pattern 31 are as shown in FIG.

  The variation pattern 32 is a collective variation pattern that is selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353, and is obtained by the big hit determination counter C1. Is 7 (probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and an odd jackpot symbol (specific big bonus symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), when the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 6 to 10 (probability 5/52), and when the big hit flag F1 = 1, or the big numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 (probability 1/315) However, when the probability variation process is set, the probability is 1/63 with 7, 33, 77, 111, 222), and an even number of big hit symbols (normally big hit symbols) are stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer ( Rate 1/2), the obtained value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 6 to 10 (probability 5/52), and the big hit flag F1 = 1, the special symbol is obtained in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23). The display device 6 displays the variation. The contents of the variation pattern 32 are as shown in FIG.

The variation pattern 4 is a collective variation pattern that is selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353, and is obtained by the big hit determination counter C1. Is 7 (probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and an odd jackpot symbol (specific big bonus symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), only when the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 0 (probability 1/52) and the big hit flag F1 = 1, the special symbol display device 6 varies in the process of step S360 (FIG. 23). Is displayed. Therefore, when the variation pattern 4 is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it always becomes an odd jackpot symbol (specific big win symbol). The contents of the variation pattern 22 are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the division variation pattern will be described in detail. There are four types of divided variation patterns: variation pattern 51, variation pattern 52, variation pattern 61, and variation pattern 62. First, variation pattern 51 is displayed on special symbol display device 6 this time through the processing of step S352 (FIG. 19). A split variation pattern that is selected when a symbol with a plus or minus one symbol is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. The acquired numerical value of the counter C1 for determination is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, but 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to when probability variation processing is set. 314, the probability 62/63), the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), and the reach symbol pattern determination counter C6 The obtained value is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), the obtained value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 32 to 41 (probability 10/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1, and the reach mode flag F3 = 1 (the processing of step S358, step S362 and step S364 in FIG. 23), the main control circuit 44 corresponds to the display control circuit 111 as described above in the processing of step S366 (FIG. 23). When the change pattern designation command (FIG. 24) is transmitted, the special symbol display device 6 displays the change pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the content of the variation pattern 51 is composed of a variation pattern introductory part, a selection screen, and a variation pattern main part, and the variation time of the entire variation pattern 51 is 35 seconds. The variation time at the beginning of the variation pattern is 10 seconds. During this time, the special symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) that are variably displayed on the symbol display units 8, 9, 10 of the special symbol display device 6 are symbols. 30. In the divided variation pattern in this embodiment, the reach is always reached at the beginning of the variation pattern. Here, the left symbol (special symbol of the left symbol display unit 8) and the right symbol (right symbol display). The special symbol of the part 10 is the same.

  Then, when the variation time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 11, 12, and 13) are displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6, as shown in FIG. Similarly, a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 21 and 22), as well as a chemical image (hereinafter also simply referred to as an image) having a motif of “forest” formed by the collected variation pattern main portion group 1 as a motif. And 23) are displayed in a substantially two-divided image with a morphological image of the “sea” as a motif of the variation pattern main part group 2, and in the lower part of the display unit 30, “Proceed to the forest” "Do you want to go to the sea? Please select either" message image 60 is displayed for 5 seconds (Hereafter, the display screen including the message image as shown in FIG. 31 is also considered as the selection screen. That is, Sage image is also a sense considered as part of the selection screen. Of course selection screen, may be without this message image). Further, instead of the message image 60, a voice message may be used. Of course, both the message image 60 and a voice message may be present. Hereinafter, a plurality of chemical images displayed on the selection screen (images such as “forest” and “sea”) are also referred to as a variation pattern main part group 70.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the selection screen is displayed, the special symbol variation display that is in the reach state becomes translucent and overlaps as if it is located on the rear surface of the selection screen. Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to concentrate on the selection screen compared to the case where the corner of the selection screen is exclusively used to display the variation of the special symbol, and also the variation of the special symbol while concentrating on the selection screen. There is an effect that it is easy to check the state. This is an effect that can be achieved by utilizing the ability to distinguish the perspective of vision that changes depending on the viewpoint of human interest.

  Thus, when the selection screen by the variation pattern main part group 70 is displayed, the player's correspondence is as follows. That is, by operating the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51, the position of the pointer 52 is determined to move within 5 seconds, that is, within the effective time of the determination button 51, and either the “forest” image or the “sea” image is determined. The case where the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is selected and the case where 5 seconds elapse without selecting any fluctuation pattern main part group 70 without operating the cross switch 50 or the determination button 51.

  First, a case where an image of one of the fluctuation pattern main part groups 70 is selected when the former selection screen is displayed will be described. When the selection screen is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6, the player operates the cross switch 50 to move the arrow pointer 52 on the display unit 30 to a desired position. For example, when the player wants to select “sea”, the pointer 52 is moved to an area where “sea” is displayed on the display unit 30. Then, when the pointer 52 is moved to a region where “sea” is displayed on the display unit 30, the determination button 51 is pressed to determine that “sea” has been selected. That is, when the player selects a desired variation pattern main part group 70 when the selection screen for the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is displayed, the arrow-shaped pointer 52 on the display unit 30 is desired by the cross switch 50. It is only necessary to press the determination button 51 after moving to the position.

  The cross switch 50 is configured in a cross shape as shown in FIG. 1, and the pointer 52 is moved up, down, left, and right by pressing an end of the cross switch 50 configured in the cross shape. Yes. For example, the pointer 52 continues to move rightward on the display unit 30 by continuously pressing the right end of the cross switch 50, and the pointer 52 stops on the display unit 30 by releasing the press.

  When the player selects “Hayashi” (variation pattern main part group 1) as the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 from the selection screen of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 The image with the motif “Hayashi” is displayed as the scene, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed while maintaining the “swing” state, and the first control is performed by random number processing performed on the display control circuit 111 side described later. 100% of the first effect character determined by the effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0 to 99) appears, and the second effect character determined by the second effect character determination counter C12 (random numbers 12, 0 to 99). The effect character appears with a predetermined probability by the second effect character appearance counter C13 (random numbers 13, 0 to 99), and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random numbers 14, 0 to 0). 99), one variation pattern main portion is selected from the three types of variation pattern main portions, that is, the variation pattern main portions 11, 12, and 13. The selected variation pattern main portion is selected by the special symbol display device 6. The symbols are displayed on the symbol display portions 8, 9, and 10 in a variable manner. In addition, the middle symbols that the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13 are variably displayed are as shown in FIG. 30. In FIG. 30, "reverse rotation medium speed" and "reverse rotation low speed" mean that the middle symbols are normal. This represents the fluctuation speed when scrolling display in the reverse direction, and the rest is the same as in FIG.

  That is, the selection screen by the variation pattern main part group 70 is displayed, and when the player decides to move the position of the pointer 52 by operating the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51 within the valid time of the decision button 51, that is, immediately after that, that is, The selected variation pattern main part is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6 immediately after the determination button 51 is pressed. Therefore, when the enter button 51 is operated in this way, the player can wait for 5 seconds of the valid time of the enter button 51 (in other words, 5 seconds of the maximum display time of the selection screen) without waiting for the special symbol. As a result, the game can be enjoyed without stress.

Here, when the player operates the decision button 51 on the selection screen, the special symbol display device 6 immediately displays the initial variation as the variation display of the variation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13 immediately thereafter, and then the main variation. Is displayed. As will be described later in detail, the display time of the initial fluctuation is 5 seconds at the maximum. This is the time taken from the effective time of the decision button 51 to 5 seconds until the player actually presses the decision button 51. It is time to subtract. The display time of the main variation is 20 seconds regardless of the operation of the enter button 51. That is, the display time of the selection screen in the variation pattern 51 is equivalent to the time until the player operates the determination button 51 and is 5 seconds at the maximum, and the variation pattern main portion (variation pattern main portions 11, 12, 13). ) Is a time obtained by adding the display time of the initial fluctuation and the main fluctuation to 20 to 25 seconds.

  Furthermore, the variation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13 are set with the degree of the effect (reliability that becomes a big hit). In this case, the effect effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is the lowest, and the fluctuation pattern main part The effect effect of 12 is the next lowest, and the effect effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 13 is the highest. The process of selecting one fluctuation pattern main part from the above-described fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13 will be described in detail later, based on the time until the player presses the enter button 51. In this case, if the time until the decision button 51 is pressed is short, there is a high probability that the variation pattern main part 13 having a high effect is selected, and the time until the decision button 51 is pressed. If the length is long, the probability that the variation pattern main part 11 having a low production effect is selected is high.

  Similarly, the degree of the stage effect (reliability to be a big hit) is set for each of the second stage characters, and the time until the decision button 51 is pressed for selection of the second stage character having a different stage effect. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short, the second effect character having a high effect is likely to be selected. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is long, the effect is low. The probability that the second performance character is selected is high. Further, whether or not the second effect character appears is executed based on the time until the determination button 51 is pressed. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short, the probability that the second effect character appears is high. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is long, the probability that the second effect character appears is low.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 30, when the player selects “Sea” (variation pattern main part group 2) as the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 from the selection screen of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, the special symbol display device 6 On the display unit 30, an image having “sea” as a motif is displayed as a scene, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed in a “swing” state. Similarly to the variation pattern main part group 1 described above, one fluctuation pattern main part is selected from the fluctuation pattern main parts 21, 22, and 23, and the selected fluctuation pattern main part is displayed on the special symbol display device 6. The symbols are displayed on the symbol display portions 8, 9, and 10 in a variable manner. The first and second effect characters are also the same as the variation pattern main part group 1 described above, and the effect of the change pattern main parts 21, 22, and 23, the initial variation and the main variation display time, and the variation The middle symbols to be displayed are as shown in FIG. 30 and are processed in accordance with the variation pattern main part group 1. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted here.

Next, the latter case where neither variation pattern main part group 70 is selected when the selection screen is displayed will be described. In a case other than when the player presses the decision button 51 after the selection screen is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 until 5 seconds elapse after the cross switch 50 is operated, that is, the selection If the operation of the cross switch 50 and the enter button 51 is not finished within 5 seconds after the screen is displayed, it is considered that the player has not selected any variation pattern main group 70. become. In this case, the variation pattern main part group 70 is automatically determined based on the position of the pointer 52 when the selection screen ends, that is, when five seconds have elapsed after the selection screen is displayed. ing. That is, when the position of the pointer 52 when five seconds have elapsed after the selection screen is displayed points to the “forest” area on the display unit 30 as shown in FIG. It is assumed that “forest” has been selected as the group 70, while not shown, but when the “sea” region is indicated on the display unit 30, “sea” is selected as the variation pattern main group 70. It is supposed to be done.

  That is, in FIG. 30, when it is considered that the player has selected “Hayashi” (variation pattern main part group 1) as the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 from the selection screen of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, In the display unit 30 of FIG. 6, an image having “forest” as a scene is displayed as a scene. The image with the motif of “sea” is displayed as a scene, and the left and right symbols are displayed in a “swing” state.

  When it is considered that the variation pattern main part group 70 has been selected, the process shifts to the fluctuation pattern main part, and from among the plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts, regardless of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 described later. The variation pattern main portion having the lowest effect is selected, and the selected variation pattern main portion (variation pattern main portion 11 or 21) is, as described above, each symbol display portion 8 of the special symbol display device 6, 9 and 10 are displayed in a variable manner. In this case, as will be described in detail later, although the first effect character determined by the first effect character determination counter C11 appears 100%, the second effect character determination counter C12 and the second effect character appear. Regardless of the counter C13, the second performance character does not appear forcibly.

  Therefore, in this case, the display time of the selection screen is a maximum of 5 seconds (in other words, when the effective time of the decision button 51 has elapsed 5 seconds), and when the 5 seconds have elapsed, the special symbol display device 6 has an initial variation of Only the main fluctuation is displayed without being displayed. That is, in this case, the display time of the selection screen in the fluctuation pattern 51 is 5 seconds, and the display time of the fluctuation pattern main part (fluctuation pattern main part 11 or 21) is the same as the main fluctuation display time, which is 20 seconds. In addition, when the enter button 51 is not operated in this way, the effect of rendering is lowest in the subsequent variable display.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 52 will be described. The variation pattern 52 is a divided variation pattern that is selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353 (FIG. 19), and is shown in FIG. As described above, the acquisition value of the jackpot determination counter C1 acquired in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in step S308 is 7 (probability 1/315, but when the probability variation process is set, 7, 33, 77, 111, 222) (Probability 1/63), odd jackpot symbol (specific big hit symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), and the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 11 to 35 (probability 25/52), When the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the processing of step S358 in FIG. 23), or the acquired numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 (probability 1/315, however, the probability variation processing) When set, it is 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and even the big hit symbol storage buffer (usually big hit symbol) is stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2). When the obtained numerical value is 11 to 26 (probability 16/52) and the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the process of step S358 in FIG. 23), the main control is performed as described above in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23). When the variation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern 52 is transmitted from the circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, the special symbol display device 6 displays the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 32, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 52 are substantially the same as the contents of the fluctuation pattern 51 described above, and therefore, differences from the fluctuation pattern 51 will be described here. The content of the variation pattern 52 is different from the variation pattern 51 in that the variation time of the entire variation pattern 52 is 37 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern main part is 22 to 27 seconds, and the variation pattern. The main part group 70 is different in content.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 in the fluctuation pattern 52 are composed of a fluctuation pattern main part group 3 and a fluctuation pattern main part group 4. First, the fluctuation pattern main part group 3 is a fluctuation pattern. It consists of main parts 31, 32, 33, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 31, 32, 33 is 22 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main part 31 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main part 32 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main part 33 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 1, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 4 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 41, 42, and 43. The main fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern main parts 41, 42, and 43 are 22 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main part 41 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main part 42 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main part 43 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 2, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 61 will be described. The variation pattern 61 is a divided variation pattern that is selected when the reach deviation symbol of plus or minus one symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S352 (FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 28, the acquired numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 acquired in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in step S308 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, however, the probability variation process setting) The time is 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314, and the probability 62/63). The acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12). The acquired numerical value of the symbol mode determining counter C6 is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), the acquired numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 42 to 51 (probability 10/52), When the hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1, and the reach mode flag F3 = 1 (the processes in steps S358, S362, and S364 in FIG. 23), the process in step S366 (FIG. 23) is as described above. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 61 is transmitted from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, the special symbol display device 6 displays the fluctuation pattern.

  The contents of the variation pattern 61 are substantially the same as the contents of the variation pattern 51 described above, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, and therefore, differences from the variation pattern 51 will be described here. The content of the variation pattern 61 is different from the variation pattern 51 in that the variation time of the entire variation pattern 61 is 40 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern main part is 25 to 30 seconds, and the selection screen And the contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 are different.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the selection screen for the variation pattern 61 is a variation pattern main portion in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 51, 52 and 53) are gathered on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. In the same way, an image with the motif of “soccer” that Group 5 has formed, and a variation pattern main group 6 in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 61, 62, and 63) are gathered are embodied. Similarly, an image with “Kendo” as a motif, which is an image of a variation pattern main portion group 7 in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 71, 72 and 73) are gathered. In the middle of the left and right, the message is displayed in three parts, and at the bottom of the display section 30 is a message “Do you want to go to football? Do you want to go to baseball? Image 60 And it is displayed for 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 34, the contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 in the variation pattern 61 are composed of a fluctuation pattern main part group 5, a fluctuation pattern main part group 6, and a fluctuation pattern main part group 7.
First, the fluctuation pattern main part group 5 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 51, 52, and 53. The main fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern main parts 51, 52, and 53 are 25 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 51 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 52 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main portion 53 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 or 2, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 6 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 61, 62, 63, and the main fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern main parts 61, 62, 63 are 25 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 61 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 62 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main portion 63 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 or 2 and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 7 is constituted by fluctuation pattern main parts 71 and 72 (that is, the fluctuation pattern main part group 7 is constituted by two kinds of fluctuation pattern main parts), and each fluctuation pattern main part. The main fluctuations of 71 and 72 are 25 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 71 is low, and the effect of the variation pattern main portion 72 is high. The contents other than these are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 or 2 and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 62 will be described. The variation pattern 62 is a divided variation pattern selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353 (FIG. 19), and is shown in FIG. As described above, the acquisition value of the jackpot determination counter C1 acquired in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in step S308 is 7 (probability 1/315, but when the probability variation process is set, 7, 33, 77, 111, 222) (Probability 1/63), odd jackpot symbol (specific big hit symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), and the obtained value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 36 to 51 (probability 16/52), When the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the processing of step S358 in FIG. 23), or the acquired numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 (probability 1/315, however, the probability variation processing) When set, it is 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and even the big hit symbol storage buffer (usually big hit symbol) is stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2). When the obtained numerical value is 27 to 51 (probability 25/52) and the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the process of step S358 in FIG. 23), the main control is performed as described above in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23). When the variation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern 62 is transmitted from the circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, the variation is displayed on the special symbol display device 6.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the content of the variation pattern 62 is substantially the same as the content of the variation pattern 61 described above, and therefore, differences from the variation pattern 61 will be described here. The variation pattern 62 differs from the variation pattern 61 in that the variation time of the entire variation pattern 62 is 42 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern main part is 27 to 32 seconds, and the variation pattern. The main part group 70 is different in content.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 in the fluctuation pattern 62 are composed of a fluctuation pattern main part group 8, a fluctuation pattern main part group 9, and a fluctuation pattern main part group 10. The group 8 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 81, 82, 83, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 81, 82, 83 is 27 seconds. Further, the effect of the variation pattern main part 81 is the lowest, the effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 82 is the next lowest, and the effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 83 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 5, and are as shown in FIG.

Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 9 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 91, 92, 93, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 91, 92, 93 is 27 seconds. Furthermore, the production effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 91 is the lowest, the production effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 92 is the next lowest, and the production effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 93 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 6, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 10 is constituted by fluctuation pattern main parts 101 and 102 (that is, the fluctuation pattern main part group 10 is constituted by two kinds of fluctuation pattern main parts), and each fluctuation pattern main part. The main fluctuation of 101 and 102 is 27 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main part 101 is low, and the effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 102 is high. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 7, and are as shown in FIG.

  Here, in the case where the divided variation pattern is displayed on the special symbol display device 6, when the player selects the desired variation pattern main part group 70 when the selection screen is displayed on the display unit 30, the display is performed. Processing executed by the control circuit 111 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a display main control process (main routine) executed by the CPU 140 of the display control circuit 111. Immediately after the power is turned on, the CPU 140 initializes each flag, each register, each storage area and the like necessary for stack setting and the following processing as initialization processing (step S701). When completing the initialization process in step S701, the CPU 140 proceeds to the random number update process in step S703. The CPU 140 executes a main routine (each program stored in the ROM 142 of the display control circuit 111), that is, each process of steps S703 to S760 described below, every reset interrupt (4 msec).

  FIG. 37 is a list of random numbers handled in the display control circuit 111. As shown in FIG. 37, various counters C11 to C14 (random numbers 11 to 14) are set in the main control circuit 44 as random numbers for setting the display mode at random. CPU140 updates the value regarding each counter C11-C14 by the random number update process of step S703. The first effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0 to 99) displays the first effect character to appear on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 when displaying the variation pattern main part in the divided variation pattern. This is a random number counter for determination, which starts from 0 when the power is turned on and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C11 becomes 100, it is rewritten to 0.

  The second effect character determination counter C12 (random numbers 12, 0 to 99) displays the second effect character that appears on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 when displaying the variation pattern main part in the divided variation pattern. A random number counter for determination, which starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) each time the first effect character determination counter C11 is set to 0. However, when this random number counter C12 becomes 100, it is rewritten to 0.

  The second effect character appearance counter C13 (random numbers 13, 0 to 99) causes the second effect character to appear on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 when displaying the variation pattern main part in the divided variation pattern. This is a random number counter for determining whether or not it starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) each time the second effect character determination counter C12 is set to 0. However, when this random number counter C13 becomes 100, it is rewritten to 0.

The fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random numbers 14, 0 to 999) is a random number counter for determining the fluctuation pattern main part to be displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 in the divided fluctuation pattern. , Start from 0 when the power is turned on, reset interrupt (4ms
c) Incremented (added by 1) every time. However, when this random number counter C14 becomes 1000, it is rewritten to 0.

  Returning to FIG. 36, when the CPU 140 finishes the random number update process of step S703, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S705, where steps S360, S361, S363, and the special symbol variation display process (FIG. 23) described above are performed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been input from the main control circuit 44 by the processing of step S365 or step S366. If NO in step S705, that is, if a variation pattern designation command is not input from the main control circuit 44, the process proceeds to step S750. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S705, that is, if a change pattern designation command is input from the main control circuit 44, the process proceeds to step S707, and the CPU 140 executes a change pattern display process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern display process (step S707). When the variation pattern display process is executed, the CPU 140 first determines in step S709 whether or not the variation pattern designation command input this time is a command corresponding to the divided variation pattern. In step S709, NO, that is, the fluctuation pattern designation command inputted this time does not correspond to the divided fluctuation pattern, that is, the fluctuation pattern designation command inputted this time is a command corresponding to the collective fluctuation pattern. In this case, the process proceeds to step S710, and the CPU 140 specially selects one of the collective variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command input this time, that is, any one of the variation patterns 1, 4, 21, 22, 31, or 32. The symbol display device 6 displays the variation, and the process proceeds to step S737.

  On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S709, that is, if the fluctuation pattern designation command input this time is a command corresponding to the divided fluctuation pattern, the process proceeds to step S711, and the CPU 140 described above. Among the counters C11 to C14, the current value of the counter C11 is acquired and stored in the acquired numerical value storage area of the RAM 141. That is, at the timing when the display control circuit 111 receives the variation pattern designation command as a command corresponding to the divided variation pattern from the main control circuit 44, the first effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0 to 99). Is obtained, and the first effect character that appears when the variation pattern main part of the divided variation pattern described above is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6 is determined. Thereby, the uniformity and irregularity of the numerical value acquired by the counter C11 for determining the first effect character are ensured, and accordingly, the first effect character appearing when the variation pattern main part is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6. The uniformity and irregularity of the contents are ensured, and the gaming property of the gaming machine 1 is improved. The contents of the first effect character will be described in detail later.

  When the random number acquisition process in step S711 ends, the CPU 140 proceeds to step S713 and executes the process of displaying the variation pattern introductory part. In the process of displaying the fluctuation pattern introductory part in step S713, the beginning of the above-described divided fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command input this time, that is, one of the beginnings of the fluctuation patterns 51, 52, 61 or 62 is displayed. A process of variably displaying on the special symbol display device 6 is executed. When the process of step S713 is finished, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S715.

When the process proceeds to step S715, the CPU 140 determines whether or not the variation pattern beginning displayed in step S713 has ended, that is, whether or not the variation time (10 seconds) of the variation pattern beginning has elapsed. To do. If NO in step S715, that is, if the fluctuation time (10 seconds) has not elapsed and the fluctuation display at the beginning of the fluctuation pattern has not ended, the CPU 140 ends the fluctuation pattern display process and displays the main display. Returning to the control process (FIG. 36), the process proceeds to step S750. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S715, that is, if the fluctuation time (10 seconds) has elapsed and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern intro has ended, the process proceeds to step S717, and the CPU 140 displays the selection screen. Execute the process. In the selection screen display process in step S717, the above-described divided variation pattern selection screen corresponding to the variation pattern designation command input this time, that is, the variation pattern 51, 52, 61 or 62 selection screen (FIG. 31 or FIG. 33). ) Is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. When the process of step S717 is completed, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S719.

  When the process proceeds to step S719, the CPU 140 determines whether or not there is an input from the cross switch 50 as an operation unit, and YES in the process of step S719, that is, when there is an input from the cross switch 50. In step S721, the CPU 140 moves and displays the pointer 52 on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 based on the input, and then proceeds to step S723. On the other hand, if NO in the process of step S719, that is, if there is no input from the cross switch 50, the CPU 140 proceeds directly to the process of step S723.

  When the process proceeds to step S723, the CPU 140 determines whether or not there is an input from the determination button 51 as an operation unit, and YES in the process of step S723, that is, when there is an input from the determination button 51. That is, when one of the plurality of variation pattern main part groups 70 displayed on the divided variation pattern selection screen is selected, the process proceeds to step S725, and the CPU 140 performs the variation pattern main part selection process. Execute.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern main part selection process (step S725). When the variation pattern main part selection process is executed, the CPU 140 first acquires the current values of the counters C12, C13, and C14 out of the counters C11 to C14 described above in step S727, and acquires the RAM 141. Each is stored in the numerical storage area.

  Here, the values of the counters C12, C13, and C14 indicate the timing at which the display control circuit 111 receives an input from the determination button 51 as the operation means, in other words, the player presses the determination button 51 as the operation means. It is acquired on the basis of the operation timing and the time from when the selection screen is displayed until the player presses the enter button 51 as the operation means. When the part is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it is determined whether or not the second effect character and the second effect character appear, and the plural set in the selected variation pattern main part group 70 One fluctuation pattern main part is determined from among the fluctuation pattern main parts. As a result, the uniformity and irregularity of the obtained numerical values of the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 are ensured. Uniformity and irregularity of the contents and appearance ratio of the second effect character appearing when the special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed and the contents of the variation pattern main part are guaranteed, and the gaming property of the gaming machine 1 is remarkably increased. Will improve. The contents of the second effect character will be described in detail later.

When the random number acquisition process in step S727 ends, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process in step S731, and the first effect character, the second effect character, and the change corresponding to the input value of the determination button 51 and the values of the counters C11 to C14. A process of displaying a predetermined display of the pattern main part on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 for a predetermined time is executed. That is, the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 (the above-described fluctuation pattern main part groups 1 to 10, FIG. 30, FIG. 32, FIG. 34, FIG. 35) is determined by the input value of the determination button 51 (value indicating the position of the pointer 52). When the second effect character appears based on the value of the second effect character appearance counter C13, the second effect character determined based on the value of the second effect character determination counter C12 is displayed, and the variation pattern main The variation pattern main part determined by the value of the part determination counter C14 is displayed, and the first effect character determined by the value of the first effect character determination counter C11 is displayed.

  Here, in the process of this step S731, when the player presses the enter button 51, the main part of the variation pattern selected immediately after that, without waiting for 5 seconds of the valid time of the enter button 51 to pass, The special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed. As described above, the display time of the main part of the fluctuation pattern is 20 to 25 seconds (FIG. 30) in the fluctuation pattern 51, 22 to 27 seconds (FIG. 32) in the fluctuation pattern 52, and 25 to 30 seconds in the fluctuation pattern 61. (FIG. 34) and the fluctuation pattern 62 are 27 to 32 seconds (FIG. 35). This is due to the fact that the display time of the selection screen is a maximum of 5 seconds, that is, the time from when the player displays the selection screen until the decision button 51 is operated. In addition, the relationship between each divided variation pattern 51, 52, 61, 62 and each counter C11-C14 will be described in detail later. When the process of step S731 is completed, the CPU 140 returns to the variation pattern display process (FIG. 38) and proceeds to the process of step S737.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S723, that is, if there is no input from the enter button 51, that is, one variation pattern main group is still selected from the plurality of variation pattern main part groups 70 displayed on the divided variation pattern selection screen. If the group 70 has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S733, and the CPU 140 determines whether or not 5 seconds as the valid time of the decision button 51 on the selection screen has elapsed, and in step S733. If NO in the process, i.e., 5 seconds have not elapsed and the valid time of the decision button 51 on the selection screen is still available, the variation pattern main part selection process is terminated and the process returns to the display main control process (FIG. 36). The process proceeds to S750. On the other hand, if YES in the processing of step S733, that is, if 5 seconds have elapsed and there is no valid time for the enter button 51 on the selection screen, that is, during the valid time for the enter button 51 on the selection screen, If the determination button 51 is not pressed, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S735.

  When the process proceeds to step S735, the CPU 140 executes the following process. That is, if the player never presses the enter button 51 during the valid time of the enter button 51 on the selection screen, the current value of the pointer 52 is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. Thus, the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is automatically determined, and the fluctuation pattern main having the lowest effect is forcibly selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts set in the determined fluctuation pattern main part group 70. Regardless of the value of the second effect character appearance counter C13, the appearance rate of the second effect character is forcibly set to 0%, and the second effect character is not displayed. Processing for displaying the first effect character determined by the value of the effect character determination counter C11 is executed. Then, when the process of step S735 is finished, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S737.

  When the process proceeds to step S737, the CPU 140 performs the all symbol stop designation command by the process of step S360, step S361, step S363, step S365 or step S366 of the special symbol variation display process (FIG. 23) described here. It is determined whether or not an input has been made from the control circuit 44. If NO in step S737, that is, if no all symbol stop designation command is input from the main control circuit 44, the CPU 140 ends the variation pattern display process (step S707). On the other hand, if YES in step S737, that is, if an all symbol stop designation command is input from the main control circuit 44, the process proceeds to step S739, and the CPU 140 displays a special symbol display in step S731 or step S735. A special symbol of a predetermined divided variation pattern (variation pattern main part) that is variably displayed on the device 6, that is, the left, middle, and right symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display portions 8, 9, and 10 are stopped and confirmed. Execute the process. Then, when the process of step S739 is completed, the CPU 140 ends the variation pattern display process (step S707).

  That is, in this variation pattern display process (step S707), as shown in FIG. 40A, when any of the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62 starts to vary in the special symbol display device 6, First, the fluctuation pattern beginning is displayed for 10 seconds, and the reach state is displayed on the display unit 30. When 10 seconds have elapsed and the selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 or 33, the player operates the cross switch 50 to the desired variation pattern main group 70 by operating the cross switch 50. The change pattern main part group 70 is determined by moving and pressing the determination button 51. However, the maximum display time of the selection screen is 5 seconds. Therefore, the player must end the operation of the decision button 51 within 5 seconds after the selection screen is displayed. That is, the valid time of the enter button 51 is 5 seconds.

  Then, if the enter button 51 is operated within 5 seconds, the special symbol display device 6 immediately changes to the selection screen so that the selected fluctuation pattern main part starts to fluctuate. The change will be displayed and then the main change will be displayed. Here, the initial variation display time is a maximum of 5 seconds, that is, the initial variation display time is obtained by subtracting the time required for the player to actually press the decision button 51 from the decision button 51 effective time of 5 seconds. It will be time. That is, the display time of the initial fluctuation is an unspecified time. Accordingly, the display time of the selection screen is a time obtained by subtracting the display time of the initial variation from 5 seconds of the valid time of the decision button 51, and the display time of the selection screen is also an unspecified time. On the other hand, the display time of the main variation is a specific time, which is 20 seconds for the variation pattern 51, 22 seconds for the variation pattern 52, 25 seconds for the variation pattern 61, and 27 seconds for the variation pattern 62. This is a time obtained by adding the display time of the initial fluctuation and the main fluctuation. Further, the second effect character selected based on the operation of the determination button 51 appears at a predetermined rate and is displayed in parallel with the display of the variation pattern main part. FIG. 40A is a timing chart from the start of change to the stop of the division change pattern.

  As described above, the extraction of the variation pattern main part and the second effect character and the appearance rate of the second effect character are determined based on the timing when the player operates the determination button 51 and the time until the operation. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), a variation pattern main part determination counter C14 is selected from a plurality of variation pattern main parts having different effects, which are set in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70. When one variation pattern main part is extracted based on the obtained numerical value, if the operation time of the player's decision button 51 is within one second after the selection screen is displayed, the variation pattern main part having the highest effect is produced. The probability of extraction is high, and the fluctuation pattern main part with high production effect is extracted in the order of operation time exceeding 1 second within 3 seconds and exceeding 3 seconds within 5 seconds. It has become to so that. If the player does not operate the determination button 51 during the display of the selection screen for 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern main part having the lowest effect is extracted 100%. For example, when this is applied to the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 (see FIG. 30), the probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 13 is extracted is high when the operation time is within 1 second, and the operation time exceeds 1 second and is 3 seconds. The probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 12 is extracted is high when the time is within the range, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is extracted is high when the operation time exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds. When the determination button 51 is not operated, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is forcibly extracted. FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation time of the enter button 51, the fluctuation pattern main part, the extraction of the second effect character, and the appearance rate of the second effect character.

Similarly, when one second effect character is extracted from a plurality of second effect characters having different effect effects based on the obtained value of the second effect character determination counter C12, the operation time may be within 1 second. For example, the probability that the second performance character with the highest performance effect is extracted is high, and the second performance effect is higher in the order of operation time exceeding 1 second within 3 seconds and exceeding 3 seconds within 5 seconds. The probability that an effect character is extracted is lowered. When the determination button 51 is not operated, the second effect character does not appear 100%.

  Here, the contents of the second effect character will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the contents of the first effect character will also be described. FIG. 41 (A) is an explanatory view showing the contents of the first effect character and the second effect character, and FIG. 41 (B) is an explanatory view showing the effect of each second effect character. As shown in FIG. 41A, the first effect character is provided with four types of “bats”, “cross”, “ghost”, and “dracula” as characters with low effect, and the second effect character is: There are four types of characters, “Frankenstein”, “Wolf Man”, “Mummy”, and “Mako”, as characters with high performance effects. In addition, each character in the first effect character (“bat”, “cross”, “ghost”, “dracula”) is equally provided in the effect, but each character in the second effect character (“Frankenstein” "" Wolf man "" Mummy "" Mako "), as shown in FIG. 41B, the effect of" Frankenstein "is the lowest, and the effect of" Wolf man "" Mummy "increases in the order It is set so that the production effect of “Mako” is the highest.

  In addition, each 2nd production character is set up corresponding to each division change pattern, and although it explains in full detail later, "Frankenstein" "Wolf man" "Mummy" is set up corresponding to all the division change patterns. However, “Mako” is set only in the division variation pattern 62. That is, in the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, one of “Frankenstein”, “Wolf man”, and “Mummy” appears as the second effect character, and in the divided variation pattern 62, “Frankenstein” “Wolf man”. "Mummy" or "Mako" appears. This “Mako” is treated exceptionally, that is, when the variation pattern 62 is displayed as a divided variation pattern, only when the operation time is within one second, a predetermined probability (relatively low probability). ) To appear. That is, when “Mako” appears, it becomes a so-called premium reach.

  Therefore, the second effect character has a high probability that “mummy” is extracted when the operation time is within 1 second, and the probability that “wolf man” is extracted when the operation time exceeds 1 second and is within 3 seconds. When the operation time exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, the probability that “Frankenstein” will be extracted increases. Further, when the operation time is within 1 second, “Mako” may be extracted. And when there is no operation of the determination button 51, a 2nd effect character is not forcedly appeared.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not to cause the second effect character to appear based on the acquired value of the second effect character appearance counter C13, if the operation time is within one second, the probability of appearance is high. The probability of appearing in the order of operation time exceeding 1 second within 3 seconds and exceeding 3 seconds within 5 seconds is lowered. And when there is no operation of the determination button 51, a 2nd effect character is not forcedly appeared.

  Returning to FIG. 36, when the process proceeds to step S750, the CPU 140 executes other processes. The CPU 140 executes various processes in the display main control process other than the processes in steps S701 to S739 described above. Since these processes are not particularly related to the present invention, other processes in step S750 are performed. The explanation is omitted.

  When the process of step S750 ends, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S760 and executes a random number update process. This performs a loop process that continuously updates the values of the random number counters C11 to C14 (see FIG. 37) in the random number update process of step S703 described above until the next reset interrupt occurs.

  The process of step S760 is the same as the random number update process of step S60 performed in the main game process described above, and the values of the random number counters C11 to C14 are updated using the remaining time of the display main control process. For example, a process of continuously incrementing (decrementing 1) or decrementing (decrementing 1) the values of the random number counters C11 to C14 until the remaining time is consumed, or each random number counter according to a predetermined formula The process etc. which continue updating the value of C11-C14 are performed.

  Next, the relationship between each division variation pattern 51, 52, 61, 62 and each counter C11-C14 is demonstrated, referring FIG. 42 thru | or FIG. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the division variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62 and the first effect character determination counter C11 in the display control circuit 111. As described above, when it is determined in step S709 (FIG. 38) that the variation pattern designation command from the main control circuit 44 input in step S705 (FIG. 36) corresponds to the divided variation pattern, When the acquired numerical value of the first effect character determination counter C11 (random number 11, 0 to 99) acquired in the random number 11 acquisition process in step S711 is 0 to 24, the “bat” is (probability 25/100), 25 to 49. Is “cross” (probability 25/100), 50-74 is “ghost” (probability 25/100), and 75-99 is “Dracula” (probability 25/100). In the process of step S735, it is displayed in a predetermined manner on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6.

  In other words, in each of the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62, the first effect character has a plurality of first effects with the same probability (25/100) by the first effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0-99). One of the effect characters is selected. That is, in each of the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62, the first effect character has an appearance rate of 100%, and the appearance rates of the first effect characters are evenly provided.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 51 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111 (in the case of the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest)). That is, it is determined that the variation pattern designation command from the main control circuit 44 input in step S705 (FIG. 36) corresponds to the divided variation pattern 51 in step S709 (FIG. 38), and the enter button is determined in step S723. This is a case where it is determined that there is an input from 51 and it is determined that this input has selected the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 (forest).

  In this case, if the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second, the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random numbers 14, 13) acquired in the random number 12, 13, 14 acquisition process (FIG. 39) in step S727. 0 to 999) when the obtained numerical value is 0 to 49, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is (probability 5/100), 50 to 199 is the fluctuation pattern main part 12 (probability 15/100), and 200 to 999 is the fluctuation. The pattern main part 13 (probability 80/100) is displayed in a predetermined manner on the display part 30 of the special symbol display device 6 in the process of step S731.

  In other words, in the divided variation pattern 51 selected when the symbol of the plus / minus 1 symbol is displayed, the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected within 1 second after the selection screen is displayed. The fluctuation pattern main part is a plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts with a high probability in the order of the fluctuation pattern main part 13 having a high production effect, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 having a medium production effect, and the fluctuation pattern main part 11 having a low production effect. One of them is selected.

Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 1 second and is within 3 seconds, when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 299, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 (probability 30 / 100), 300 to 699, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 is displayed in a predetermined manner (probability 40/100), and 700 to 999 is the fluctuation pattern main part 13 (probability 30/100). The fluctuation pattern main part is selected with the same probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 12 with the medium effect is the highest probability, the fluctuation pattern main part 13 with the high effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 11 with the low effect is selected with the same probability. It has become.

  Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 799, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 has a probability of 80 / 100), 800 to 949, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 is displayed in a predetermined manner (probability 15/100), and when it is 950 to 999 (probability 5/100), The fluctuation pattern main part is selected with a high probability in the order of the fluctuation pattern main part 11 having a low production effect, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 having a medium production effect, and the fluctuation pattern main part 13 having a high production effect. Yes.

  If it is determined in step S723 (FIG. 38) that there is no input from the determination button 51 and it is considered that the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected, the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 is selected. Regardless of (random numbers 14, 0 to 999), the variation pattern main part 11 having the lowest rendering effect is forcibly (100%) selected in the process of step S735.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the operation time of the decision button 51 is within 1 second and the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected, in the random number 12, 13, and 14 acquisition processing (FIG. 39) in step S727 When the acquired numerical value of the second effect character determination counter C12 (random number 12, 0-99) is 0-4, “Frankenstein” is (probability 5/100), and when it is 5-19, “Wolf man” is ( When the probability is 15/100) and 20 to 99, “Mummy” is (probability 80/100), and the acquired numerical value of the second effect character appearance counter C13 (random numbers 13, 0 to 99) acquired in the process of step S727 is obtained. Is displayed in a predetermined manner on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 in the process of step S731 only when is 0 to 89 (probability 90/100).

  In other words, in the divided variation pattern 51 selected when the symbol of the plus / minus 1 symbol is displayed, the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected within 1 second after the selection screen is displayed. If the appearance rate of the second performance character is set to 90% and appears, the “mummy” with a high production effect, the “wolf man” with a medium production effect, and the “Frankenstein” with a low production effect. One of the plurality of second effect characters is selected with a high probability in the order of.

  Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 is longer than 1 second and within 3 seconds, “Frankenstein” (probability 30 / 100), 30-69, “Wolf Man” (probability 40/100), 70-99, “Mummy” (probability 30/100), and the second presentation character appearance counter C13 has an acquired numerical value of 0 Only when it is 49 (probability 50/100), it is displayed in a predetermined manner, and the second effect character in this case is “mummy” with the highest probability of the “wolf man” with the medium effect, and the effect with the highest effect. In addition, “Frankenstein” having a low production effect is selected with the same probability.

Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, “Frankenstein” (probability 80 / 100), 80-94, “Wolf Man” (probability 15/100), 95-99, “Mummy” (probability 5/100), and the obtained numerical value of the counter C13 for second effect character appearance is 0 9 (probability 10/100) is displayed in a predetermined manner. In this case, the second effect character is “Frankenstein” having a low effect, “Wolf man, The higher “mummy” order is selected with higher probability.

  Note that “Mako” having the highest effect is not set when the variation pattern main group 1 (Hayashi) is selected, and therefore does not appear regardless of the operation time of the determination button 51 of the player. ing.

  If it is determined in step S723 (FIG. 38) that there is no input from the determination button 51 and it is considered that the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected, the second effect character determination counter C12 is selected. Regardless of (random number 12, 0-99) and second effect character appearance counter C13 (random number 13, 0-99), the appearance rate of the second effect character is forcibly (100%) in the process of step S735. The second effect character is not displayed at 0%.

  44 to 52, the explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the divided variation pattern 51 shown in FIG. 43 and the counters C12 to C14, that is, the variation pattern main group on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 51 Since this is substantially the same as when 1 (forest) is selected, only the points different from FIG. 43 will be described below.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 51 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, on the selection screen of the division variation pattern 51 for displaying the plus / minus one symbol out of reach design. In this case, the variation pattern main part group 2 (sea) is selected. 44 differs from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 21, 22, and 23 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 52 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 3 (forest) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 52 to be performed. 45 differs from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 31, 32, 33 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 52 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 4 (sea) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 52 to be performed. 46 differs from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 41, 42, and 43 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 61 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, the selection screen of the division variation pattern 61 that displays the plus / minus one symbol out-of-reach symbols. In this case, the variation pattern main group 5 (soccer) is selected. 47 is different from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 51, 52, and 53 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 61 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, on the selection screen of the division variation pattern 61 for displaying the plus / minus one symbol out of reach design. In this case, the variation pattern main part group 6 (baseball) is selected. 48, only the variation pattern main part group 70 is different from FIG. 43. That is, the variation pattern main parts 61, 62, and 63 correspond to the variation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 61 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, on the selection screen of the division variation pattern 61 that displays the plus / minus one symbol out-of-reach symbols. In this case, the variation pattern main group 7 (kendo) is selected. 49 differs from FIG. 43 in the setting contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 and the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14, and when other than these, the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected. It is the same.

  That is, FIG. 49 is different from FIG. 43 in that if the operation time of the decision button 51 is within 1 second, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 is displayed when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 199. (Probability 20/100), 200 to 999, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 is displayed (probability 70/100), that is, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 having a high production effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 71 having a low production effect in this order. It is selected by probability. If the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 1 second and is within 3 seconds, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 has a probability of 50/100 when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 499. , 500 to 999, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 is displayed (probability 50/100), that is, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 having a high production effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 71 having a low production effect are selected with the same probability. It has become. If the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 is (probability 80/100) when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 799. , 800 to 999, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 is displayed (probability 20/100), that is, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 having a low production effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 72 having a high production effect are selected in descending order of probability. It is like that.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 62 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, a big hit symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 8 (soccer) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 62 to be performed. 50 differs from FIG. 43 in the setting contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 and the second effect character and the second effect character determination counter C12 when the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second. Other than these, this is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  That is, FIG. 50 differs from FIG. 43 in that the fluctuation pattern main parts 81, 82, 83 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13, respectively, and the operation time of the decision button 51 is 1 second. If it is within the range, “Frankenstein” is (probability 5/100) when the obtained value of the second effect character determination counter C12 is 0 to 4, and “wolf man” is (probability 15/100) when it is 5 to 19. “Mummy” (probability 70/100) is displayed at 20 to 89, and “Mako” (probability 10/100) is displayed at 90 to 99. In this case, “Mako” having the highest effect is displayed. Appearing with a probability of 10%, the other second production characters are “mummy” with high production effect, “wolf man” with medium production effect, “Frankenstein” with low production effect It is adapted to be selected by the high probability.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 62 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 9 (baseball) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 62 to be performed. 51 differs from FIG. 43 in the setting contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 and the second effect character and the second effect character determination counter C12 when the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second. Other than these, this is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected. In other words, FIG. 51 is different from FIG. 50 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70. That is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 91, 92, 93 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 81, 82, 83, respectively. Otherwise, it is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 8 (soccer) is selected.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 62 and the respective counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main group 10 (kendo) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 62 to be selected. 52 differs from FIG. 43 in the following two points, and the other points are the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected. That is, the first point is the setting contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 and the fluctuation pattern main part determining counter C14, which are the same as those in FIG. 49, and therefore the fluctuation pattern main parts 71 and 72 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to read as the fluctuation pattern main parts 101 and 102. Next, the second point is the setting contents of the second effect character and the second effect character determination counter C12 when the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second, which is the same as FIG. 50 and FIG.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the division variation pattern selection screen, that is, the reach state is displayed, the player operates the determination button 51 as the operation means to change the position of the pointer 52. When the decision is made and the variation pattern main part group 70 is selected, the selection screen is immediately switched to the variation display screen in the special symbol display device 6, and the variation display of the special symbol is started again. Therefore, the player does not have to wait for the valid time of the decision button 51 to elapse, even after operating the decision button 51, so that the special symbol variation display is started again as before, and the game without stress. Will be able to enjoy. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a speedy game by omitting wasted time, and as a result, the game taste is improved.

  Further, the time from when the selection screen is displayed until the player presses the enter button 51, in other words, due to the elapsed time of the valid time of the enter button 51 until the player finishes the operation of the enter button 51. Since the subsequent variation display screen effects are different, the player can enjoy various variation display screens (variation patterns and characters) with various effects. The player's willingness to play increases. That is, the player's sense of technical intervention in the game is improved, and the presence of the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51 as operation means can be enhanced.

  In particular, in this embodiment, if the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short, there is a high probability that the display screen will have a highly variable effect display effect. Since the game was given a law to enhance the effect of the screen, the player began to devise the operation means while trying to find this law, and as a result, the game Interest is increased and the value of the operation means is increased. In addition, when the player finds this rule, he can obtain great joy and tries to operate the operating means based on this rule, so that the player's sense of technical intervention further increases. This law property may be other, for example, how close the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is close to a predetermined time.

In addition, since one of a plurality of variation patterns and characters having different effects is selected and displayed by a predetermined random number process based on the operation timing of the determination button 51 by the player, that is, a predetermined random number is displayed. The processing allows players to select each variation pattern or character that has a different production effect with a predetermined probability, while maintaining uniformity and irregularity. At the same time, the development designer can very easily develop and design the gaming machine 1 having high preference. Note that the number of characters is not limited to one, and a plurality of characters may be selected.

  In particular, in this embodiment, “Mako” having the highest effect in the second effect character is the case where the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short and only the divided variation pattern 62 corresponding to the big hit symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can be confident that if “Mako” is selected and displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it will be a big hit this time. The value of “Mako” as the second performance character is extremely increased and the value of the operation means is further increased. As a result, the gaming property of the gaming machine 1 is improved and the interest of the game is enhanced, and the player's willingness to play is remarkably increased. Increase. The variation pattern main part group 70 may also be provided with a very high value fluctuation pattern main part similar to “Mako”. Even if it does in this way, the same effect is acquired.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the signals of the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51 are directly input to the display control circuit 111 without passing through the main control circuit 44. For example, the main control circuit It is possible to avoid an input to the main control circuit 44 that rewrites the contents of the ROM 103 of the 44 and illegally generates a big hit. As a result, the anti-fraud function of the gaming machine 1 is improved, and an unexpected disadvantage to the game arcade No longer give.

  Further, when the divided variation pattern selection screen is displayed, if the player does not operate the determination button 51, the variation pattern main part having the lowest effect is forcibly selected and displayed, and Since the second effect character is not forcibly displayed, the player recognizes that a variation pattern with a very low effect is displayed when the determination button 51 is not operated, and the game In other words, the player takes the initiative to operate the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51. As a result, the value of the operation means is greatly enhanced and the existence significance thereof is increased. It becomes apparent and the technical intervention of the player is further improved.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is determined in three stages, but this is not limited, and There may be stages. Further, it is better that the time from when the determination button 51 is pressed until the variation pattern main part selected by changing to the selection screen on the special symbol display device 6 starts variation is as short as possible, but there is a slight time lag. In other words, it may be, for example, about 1 second as long as the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The main part of the fluctuation pattern is composed of the initial fluctuation and the main fluctuation. The fluctuation time of the initial fluctuation is that the time until the player presses the enter button 51 is short. The longer the probability that the character is displayed, the longer the character is displayed. Therefore, the initial variation may be clearly distinguished from the main variation, and the effect may be increased in proportion to the length of its own variation time. In addition, the main variation is not limited to the variation pattern described above, and it is preferable to prepare and select and display a large number of various effects with a variety of tastes such as so-called re-variation. In this way, the effect of the variation pattern main part is further increased, the game taste is improved, and the value of the operating means is increased. In addition, it is possible to give the player the impression that the reach effect is displayed in two stages of the reach effect of the initial variation and the reach effect of the main variation, which further enhances the effect of the variation pattern main part.

  Further, the number of fluctuation pattern main part groups 70 corresponding to the divided fluctuation pattern (selection screen) is 2 or 3, but the number of fluctuation pattern main part groups 70 is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is also limited. The image of the group 70 may also be an image (chemical image) with a motif other than “Lin”, “Sea”, “Soccer”, “Baseball”, and “Kendo”. In addition, images (chemical images) such as “forest”, “sea”, “soccer”, “baseball”, “kendo”, etc., which the fluctuation pattern main group 70 is converted to, can be recorded as moving images, still images, stereoscopic images, etc. If it does not deviate from the technical idea, it shall be within the scope of the design changes.

  Also, images (chemical images) such as “forest”, “sea”, “soccer”, “baseball”, “kendo”, etc., which the change pattern main part group 70 has formed, constitute the change pattern main part group 70 that has been realized. Depending on the number of variation patterns to be performed and the degree of reliability, the player may be expressed in a manner that arouses thinking. For example, in the “forest” image, “three wild birds fly off from the forest (when the number of fluctuation pattern main parts constituting the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is three)” or the like is performed. By configuring in this way, that is, by giving the player the opportunity to go around various thoughts, the gameability is remarkably improved, and further, the player's sense of technical intervention in the game is improved, and the presence of operation means Significance increases.

  In addition, based on the operation timing of the decision button 51 by the player, one of a plurality of variation patterns or characters having different effect effects is selected and displayed by a predetermined random number process. Only the time until pressing the enter button 51, that is, without changing the random number processing, the corresponding effect effect variation pattern or character may be set and displayed. Specifically, the change pattern main part or the second effect character having the highest effect is displayed within 1 second of the operation time of the decision button 51, and the medium change is within 3 seconds after exceeding 1 second. The pattern main part and the second effect character may be displayed, and the fluctuation pattern main part and the second effect character having the lowest effect may be displayed within 3 seconds exceeding 3 seconds.

  Further, as described above, the number of fluctuation pattern main parts corresponding to one fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is set to 2 or 3, but the number of fluctuation pattern main parts is not limited, and a single number is included. It may be included.

  Further, an effect generating means for generating a predetermined effect when a specific fluctuation pattern main part is selected may be provided. For example, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a jackpot is reached, the music that flows during the jackpot game is special music that is different from the normal time. With this configuration, the player becomes more interested in the operation means.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to set suitably the content and number of a 1st effect character and a 2nd effect character, for example, the character which serves as a 1st effect character and a 2nd effect character may be employ | adopted further, and also the 1st effect character Is 100% when displaying the main part of the variation pattern, but this is not limited, and may be 60% or 80%, for example.

  Further, the value of the first effect character determination counter C11 is acquired at the timing when the display control circuit 111 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control circuit 44, but this is changed to the variation pattern designation command. The left special symbol designation command, the right special symbol designation command, or the middle special symbol designation command may be acquired at the timing of reception, or the player selects the decision button in the same manner as the other counters C12, C13 and C14. It may be acquired at the timing when 51 is operated (the timing when the display control circuit 111 inputs a signal corresponding to the operation of the enter button 51), or may be acquired at other timing.

In addition, the values of the second effect character appearance counter C13 and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 are acquired independently, that is, the values acquired by the counters C13 and C14 are not affected. For example, when a variation pattern main part having a high effect is selected, the second effect character may appear 100% regardless of the value acquired by the counter C13 for appearance of the second effect character. On the contrary, when the second effect character does not appear, the variation pattern main portion having a low 100% effect effect may be displayed regardless of the value acquired by the variation pattern main portion determination counter C14. Similarly, the second effect character determination counter C12 also has a 100% effect effect regardless of the value acquired by the second effect character determination counter C12 when a variation pattern main part having a high effect effect is selected. A high second effect character may be determined, and conversely, when a second effect character with a low effect is determined, 100 regardless of the value acquired by the variation pattern main part determination counter C14. The main part of the fluctuation pattern having a low% effect may be displayed.

  Further, when the player does not operate the determination button 51, the appearance ratio of the second effect character is forced to 0% and is not displayed on the special symbol display device 6. Alternatively, the second effect character having the lowest effect may be forced to appear. Further, the second effect character having the least effect effect may be forced to appear only in the divided variation pattern displayed when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as a combination of special symbols. . Alternatively, if the player does not operate the enter button 51, the first effect character may be forced to have an appearance rate of 0%.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51 are provided on the hit ball supply tray 12 as described above, but this is not limited, and for example, the surplus ball tray 13 or the outer frame 22 or the inner frame The frame 23 may be provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine 1 and the structure is not particularly limited. For example, a touch panel type that directly touches the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 It may be something like this.

  The game contents of the jackpot processing may be game contents of the jackpot processing other than those described above as long as they do not deviate from this technical idea. For example, it may be a big hit game content that is adopted in so-called third type pachinko gaming machines. The special symbol display device 6 and the normal symbol display device 18 may be any device that can display symbols and numbers such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, a plasma display, and a dot matrix LED display.

  In addition, the symbol for generating the jackpot (the jackpot symbol) has been described using a predetermined three-digit symbol (special symbol). However, the jackpot symbol is not limited to three digits but may be any number of digits. . Moreover, although the above jackpot symbols have been described with the same symbol, they can be arbitrarily set, and any combination such as “ABC”, “Shochiku Ume” may be used as the jackpot symbol. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the out-of-reach symbol is only variation pattern 1, but a plurality of variation patterns may be provided.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described using the pachinko gaming machine that is one aspect of the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine where a player operates a start lever, such as a throttle gaming machine, extracts a random number related to a hit or the like, and a spinning reel is driven based on the extracted random number value. The present invention can be employed.

Next, the main correspondence between the configuration of the claims and the embodiment of the present invention will be described.
Claim 1: The game ball detection means corresponds to the start winning detection sensor 116 and the operation gate detection sensor 121, and the display command signal is a normal symbol designation command and a normal symbol stop designation command described in the text, as shown in FIG. It corresponds to a variation pattern designation command, a left special symbol designation command, a right special symbol designation command, a middle special symbol designation command and an all symbols stop designation command, the main control means corresponds to the main control circuit 44, and the symbol display device The special symbol display device 6 corresponds to the normal symbol display device 18, the symbol corresponds to the normal symbol, the special symbol, the display control means corresponds to the display control circuit 111, and the specific symbol is shown in FIG. “1, 1, 1” “3, 3, 3” “5, 5, 5” “7, 7, 7” “9, 9, 9” “ 11, 11, 11 “13, 13, 13” “2, 2, 2” “4, 4, 4” “6, 6, 6” “8, 8, 8” “10, 10, 10” “12, 12, 12” “ 14, 14, 14 ”and“ 7 ”as a winning symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 shown in FIG. 11, and the special game advantageous to the player is the jackpot processing in step S 391 and starting of step S 516. The special game generating means corresponds to the prize opening opening process, and corresponds to the gaming machine control device 100 shown in FIG. 3, the random number update process in step S20, the normal game process in step S30, and the special game process in step S40. Corresponds to the gaming machine 1, the operation means corresponds to the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51, and the operation signal input means corresponds to the input circuit of the display control circuit 111 (not shown), the processing in step S719, and the processing in step S723. The predetermined screen corresponds to the selection screen, and the effective time corresponds to the processing of step S733, which is 5 seconds of the effective time of the decision button 51. The symbol display device can be promptly displayed without waiting for the effective time to elapse. Displaying the symbols in a predetermined variation pattern is equivalent to the variation pattern main part selection processing in step S725, and the predetermined variation patterns are divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62 (variation pattern main portion 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33, 41, 42, 43, 51, 52, 53, 61, 62, 63, 71, 72, 81, 82, 83, 91, 92, 93, 101, 102), and the variation pattern display means corresponds to the display control circuit 111, the variation pattern display process of step S707 (the process of step S731).

  Claim 2: The fact that a plurality of variation patterns are provided so as to produce different effects corresponds to the description in the text corresponding to FIG. 30, FIG. 32, FIG. 34, FIG. 35, and FIG. The selection means corresponds to the processing of step S727 for acquiring the value of the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random number 14).

  Claim 3: The fact that a plurality of variation patterns are provided so that the production effects are different corresponds to the description in the text corresponding to FIG. 30, FIG. 32, FIG. 34, FIG. The rule is that if the operation time of the player's decision button 51 is within 1 second after the selection screen is displayed, the probability that the variation pattern main part having the highest effect is extracted is high, and the operation time is 1 second. Within 3 seconds within 3 seconds and within 5 seconds within 3 seconds, the probability that a fluctuation pattern main part having a high production effect is extracted decreases, or “the operation time of the decision button 51 in the latter part of the text is 1 second. The main part of the variation pattern and the second production character with the highest production effect are displayed within 3 seconds, and the medium variation pattern main part and the second production character are displayed within 3 seconds. Fluctuating putter with the lowest production effect within 5 seconds Corresponding to the description of “displaying the main part and the second effect character”, the variation pattern rule selecting means only selects the variation pattern main part selection process in step S725 or “time until the decision button 51 is pressed” in the latter part of the text. That is, it corresponds to the description that “a variation pattern or character of the corresponding effect effect may be set and displayed without performing random number processing”.

  Claim 4: When the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal is shorter than a predetermined time, a variation pattern having a high effect is selected or selected with a high probability. Is displayed after the description “Selected button 51 operation time is within 1 second and the main part of the variation pattern and the second effect character are displayed within one second” or after the selection screen is displayed. If the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second, this corresponds to a high probability that the variation pattern main part having the highest effect is extracted.

  Claim 5: When the variation pattern law selection means selects the variation pattern with high probability, the execution by the predetermined random number processing based on the timing when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal is performed in step S711. This process corresponds to the process of step S727 for acquiring the value of the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random number 14).

Claim 6: The variation pattern forced selection means corresponds to the processing of step S735.
Claim 7: The effect character corresponds to the second effect character, and the character display means corresponds to the display control circuit 111 and the process of step S731.

  Claim 8: The fact that a plurality of effect characters are provided so that the effects are different corresponds to the description in the text corresponding to FIG. 40 (B), and the character selection means is the second effect character determination counter C12 ( This corresponds to the process of step S727 for acquiring the value of the random number 12).

  Claim 9: The fact that a plurality of performance characters are provided so that the production effects are different corresponds to the description in the text corresponding to FIG. 40 (B), and the predetermined rule is that the game after the selection screen is displayed. If the operation time of the enter button 51 is within 1 second, there is a high probability that the second effect character with the highest effect is extracted, and the operation time exceeds 1 second and within 3 seconds, and exceeds 3 seconds. The probability that a second effect character having a high effect is extracted in order within 5 seconds is reduced, or “the operation time of the enter button 51 in the latter part of the text is the fluctuation pattern main part having the highest effect within 1 second. The second effect character is displayed, the medium fluctuation pattern main part and the second effect character are displayed within 3 seconds after 1 second, and the effect is the least effective within 5 seconds after 3 seconds. Variation pattern main part and second production character The character rule selecting means corresponds to the description “display”, and the character rule selecting means only performs the variation pattern main part selection processing in step S725 or “time until the determination button 51 is pressed”, that is, without performing random number processing. This corresponds to the description that “the corresponding variation pattern or effect character of the effect effect may be set and displayed”.

  Claim 10: When the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal is shorter than a predetermined time, an effect character with a high effect is selected or selected with a high probability. Is displayed after the description “Selected button 51 operation time is within 1 second and the main part of the variation pattern and the second effect character are displayed within one second” or after the selection screen is displayed. If the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second, this corresponds to a high probability that the second effect character having the highest effect is extracted.

  Claim 11: When the character rule selecting means selects the effect character with a high probability, it is executed in a predetermined random number process based on the timing when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. This corresponds to the process of step S727 for acquiring the value of the second effect character determination counter C12 (random number 12).

  Claim 12: The character forced selection means is a special symbol display device whose appearance rate is forced to 0% when the player does not operate the enter button 51 in the latter part of the text. 6 is not displayed, but instead of this, the second effect character having the lowest effect may be forced to appear ”.

Claim 13: The forced character appearance stopping means corresponds to the process of step S735.
Claim 14: The game ball detection means corresponds to the start winning detection sensor 116, and the display command signal includes a variation pattern designation command, a left special symbol designation command, a right special symbol designation command, a middle special symbol designation command and a command shown in FIG. Corresponding to all symbol stop designation commands, the main control means corresponds to the main control circuit 44, the symbol display device corresponds to the special symbol display device 6, and the multi-digit symbol corresponds to the three-digit special symbol. The predetermined order of stopping the multi-digit symbols corresponds to the description of stopping in the order of the left special symbol, the right special symbol, and the middle special symbol in the text, and FIG. 20D shows the jackpot symbol. “1, 1, 1” “3, 3, 3” “5, 5, 5” “7, 7, 7” “9, 9, 9” as combinations of special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 6 “11, 11, 11” “13, 13, 13” “2, 2 2 ”,“ 4, 4, 4 ”,“ 6, 6, 6 ”,“ 8, 8, 8 ”,“ 10, 10, 10 ”,“ 12, 12, 12 ”,“ 14, 14, 14 ” The reach out symbol corresponds to the description of the out symbol and the reach out symbol corresponding to FIG. 21A in the text, the display control means corresponds to the display control circuit 111, and the special game advantageous to the player is 3 corresponds to the jackpot process in step S391, the special game generation means corresponds to the gaming machine control device 100 shown in FIG. 3, the random number update process in step S20, the special game process in step S40, and the gaming machine corresponds to the gaming machine 1. The variation pattern introductory part corresponds to the description in the text corresponding to FIGS. 30, 32, 34, and 35, and the plurality of variation pattern main parts having different effects are the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, 31, 2, 33, 41, 42, 43, 51, 52, 53, 61, 62, 63, 71, 72, 81, 82, 83, 91, 92, 93, 101, 102, variation pattern main group Corresponds to the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 (fluctuation pattern main part groups 1 to 10), and a plurality of chemical images are displayed on the special symbol display device 6 as “forest” “sea” “soccer” “baseball”. The selection screen corresponds to the description in the text corresponding to FIG. 31 and FIG. 33, and the division variation pattern corresponds to the division variation patterns 51, 52, 61, and 62. The divided variation pattern display means corresponds to the display control circuit 111 and the variation pattern display processing in step S707, the operation means corresponds to the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51, and the operation signal input means corresponds to a display control circuit (not shown). 111 This corresponds to the input circuit, the process of step S719, and the process of step S723, and the variation pattern main part selection means corresponds to the process of step S727 for acquiring the value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random number 14) and is effective. The time corresponds to the processing of step S733, which is 5 seconds of the effective time of the decision button 51, and the symbols of the predetermined fluctuation pattern main part are quickly changed on the symbol display device without waiting for the expiration of the effective time. The display corresponds to the variation pattern main part selection process in step S725, and the variation pattern main part display means corresponds to the display control circuit 111 and the process in step S731.

  Claim 15: The fact that the operation signal input means is provided in the display control means relates to FIG. 4 in the text, and the operation signals from the operation means 50 and 51 are input to the input circuit of the display control circuit 111. Equivalent to.

1 ... game machine, 2 ... hit control handle,
3 ... Hitting ball guide rail, 4 ... Game area formation rail,
5 ... gaming area, 6 ... special symbol display (LCD),
7 ... Grand prize opening (Attacker), 8 ... Left symbol display section,
9 ... middle symbol display part, 10 ... right symbol display part,
11 ... Starting prize opening (electric tulip), 12 ... Hit ball supply tray,
13 ... Extra ball tray, 14 ... Ordinary prize opening,
15 ... Game effect lamp, 16 ... Out port,
17 ... Glass door frame, 18 ... Normal symbol display device (7-segment LED),
19 ... Normal symbol operation gate, 20 ... Windmill,
21 ... Game board, 22 ... Outer frame,
23 ... inner frame, 25 (25a, 25b, 25c, 25d) ... hold LED,
26 (26a, 26b, 26c, 26d) ... hold LED,
27 ... One-chip microcomputer, 30 ... Display unit 37 ... Lamp control circuit, 38 ... Audio control circuit,
40 ... payout control circuit, 41 ... prize ball payout device,
42 ... Launch control circuit, 43 ... Hitting ball launcher,
44 ... main control circuit, 50 ... cross switch (operation means),
51 ... Decision button (operating means) 52 ... Pointer
60 ... Message image 70 ... Change pattern main group,
100: Game machine control device 101: Input circuit,
102 ... CPU, 103 ... ROM,
104 ... RAM, 106 ... solenoid,
107 ... Solenoid, 109 ... External information terminal,
110 ... Output circuit, 111 ... Display control circuit,
113 ... Speaker, 115 ... Bus,
116 ... Starting winning detection sensor, 117 ... Count switch,
118 ... Continuous winning switch, 119 ... Hitting ball operation handle switch,
120 ... Hitting ball operation stop switch, 121 ... Actuation gate detection sensor,
122: Safe ball detection sensor, 123 ... Count switch,
130: RAM backup 131: Test terminal
140 ... CPU, 141 ... RAM,
142 ... ROM, 143 ... VDP,
144 ... VRAM, 145 ... CGROM,
146 ... RAM, VRAM backup,
A ... Counter, B ... Counter,
D ... Counter, E ... Counter,
G ... Counter, C1 ... Big hit judgment counter,
C2 ... Left stop symbol determination counter, C3 ... Middle stop symbol determination counter,
C4: right stop symbol determination counter, C5: reach determination counter,
C6: Reach symbol mode determination counter, C7: Jackpot symbol determination counter,
C8: variation pattern determination counter, C9: hit determination counter,
C10.
C11: counter for determining the first effect character,
C12: counter for determining the second effect character,
C13: Second effect character appearance counter,
C14: Variation pattern main part determination counter,
F1 ... Big hit flag, F2 ... Reach flag,
F3 ... Reach mode flag, F4 ... Hit flag,
T ... Special symbol variation time, t ... Normal symbol variation time,
ST ... Starting prize opening opening time, T1 ... Time, T2 ... Time,
T3 ... time

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special game that is valuable to a player when a predetermined symbol is variably displayed on a symbol display device and then confirmed and displayed, and the confirmed and displayed symbol is a predetermined symbol. About.

  Conventionally, game machines have been devised in various ways to improve their preferences. Above all, with the symbol display device provided on the game area, the display of whether or not the game value is given to the player is determined based on how the display method is devised, and the popularity and unpopularity of the gaming machine is determined. Therefore, various ideas are given especially. As a gaming machine having a representative game value giving display, for example, there is a so-called fever-type pachinko gaming machine, and this type of game has three symbol display parts for displaying special symbols on a special symbol display device, and is started. Based on the winning award winning prize, each symbol display section displays a fluctuating display as a spurious image that shows the state of the rotation of the symbols, characters, numbers, symbols, characters, etc. as special symbols. The display is stopped and the stopped special symbols are matched.

  As a result of the above variable display, if the stop symbol of each symbol display part is a combination of a normal symbol set in advance (normal bonus symbol), the gaming state is changed to a special game (normal bonus game) that is valuable to the player. In addition, if the stop symbol of each symbol display part is a combination of specific symbols that are determined in advance (specific bonus game), the gaming state is shifted to a special game (specific jackpot game) that is extremely valuable to the player. It has come to be.

  However, such a conventional pachinko gaming machine has the following problems. In other words, conventional pachinko machines have fewer technical interventions related to the game than the rotary machines represented by slot machines, so the player feels unsatisfactory in terms of game play. There was a point. In other words, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, once a player operates a launching device with a predetermined force, and launches a pachinko ball to a desired position in the game area, it is displayed on the symbol display device thereafter. There was no technical intervention related to the game, and it was forced to play a very boring game just by watching the change of the symbol (special symbol etc.).

  Therefore, in order to solve such problems, in recent years, a selection button that can be operated by a player is provided on a pachinko gaming machine, for example, until the symbol displayed on the symbol display device starts to fluctuate until it stops. A technique has been proposed in which a selection screen is displayed when a so-called reach state is reached, and a player operates a selection button to select one of a plurality of subsequent variation displays (for example, see Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-008309

However, in a gaming machine equipped with such an operation means such as a selection button, one can be selected from a plurality of variable displays. Only one is selected from two different patterns expressed as two different images (two different characters). Therefore, the player's sense of technical intervention in the game is not improved so much, and the game still remains. There is a problem that the person feels unsatisfactory in terms of game play.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and the object of the present invention is to provide a game machine equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player, and further techniques of the game and the player. The aim is to improve the sense of intervention and increase the value of the operating means.

In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming ball detecting means for detecting a winning or passing of a gaming ball, and the gaming ball detecting means, based on the detection of the winning or passage, a main control means for transmitting a predetermined display instruction signal, the variable display of symbols in the symbol display device by receiving the display command signal transmitted from the main control unit The display control means for performing the effect display including the display and confirming and displaying the symbol after the effect display, and when the symbol that the display control means has determined and displayed on the symbol display device is a specific symbol is advantageous to the player A special game generating means for generating a special game , comprising: operating means operable by a player , wherein the display control means includes a plurality of selectable game players as the effect display. Have choice When a selection image display process for displaying a selection image to be selected and an operation for selecting the option in the selection image using the operation means are performed, there is a range of effects that can be selected by the timing of the selection and the operation. A post-selection effect display determination process for determining a post-selection effect display which is determined and selected from the range, which is one effect mode by lottery, and the post-selection effect display determined by the selection effect determination process as the effect display And a display process performed after the selected image is displayed .

According to the first aspect of the present invention, for example, the winning or passing of the game ball to the start winning opening or the operation gate provided in the game area is detected by the game ball detecting means such as a proximity sensor, and the game ball detecting means is used for the game. Based on the detection of winning or passing of the ball, the main control means transmits a predetermined display command signal. This main control means is a device composed of a microcomputer or the like and mainly controls various circuits and devices provided in the gaming machine. The display control means receives the display command signal transmitted from this main control means. by, for displaying output Starring on the symbol display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot-matrix LED display device.

  Here, examples of the predetermined display command signal transmitted from the main control means to the display control means include control signals such as a strobe signal for recognizing the command signal and a command signal for display control. When the display control means confirms and displays the symbol on the symbol display device is a specific symbol, for example, a predetermined number symbol “777” or the like, the special game generating means is advantageous to the player. A special game is generated. As a special game, for example, in a so-called first type pachinko game machine, a game that opens a big winning opening as a big hit game in a predetermined manner, a game that opens an electric accessory as a hit game for a predetermined time, etc. It corresponds to. The specific design also includes a 1-digit, 2-digit, or 4-digit or more numeric design.

It is a front view showing game machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a front view which shows the special symbol display apparatus 6 of this embodiment. It is a principal part block diagram of the game machine control apparatus 100 of this embodiment. 3 is a schematic block diagram illustrating a relationship between a main control circuit 44 and a display control circuit 111 according to the present embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a list figure of the random number handled in the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the operation gate passage process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding LED lighting control processing which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the random value of the off symbol determination counter C10 of this embodiment, and a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning opening release process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the hold LED extinction control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize winning process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding LED lighting control processing which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the random number value of each of the left stop symbol determination counter C2, the middle stop symbol determination counter C3, the right stop symbol determination counter C4, and the big hit symbol determination counter C7 of this embodiment and each special symbol. . The process of creating the special symbol of the present embodiment based on the random numbers of the left stop symbol determination counter C2, the middle stop symbol determination counter C3, the right stop symbol determination counter C4, and the big hit symbol determination counter C7 is shown. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation display process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing of the transmission data which the display control circuit 111 transmitted from the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment and controls the special symbol display apparatus 6 receives. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the hold LED extinction control process which the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment performs. It is a distribution pattern of the fluctuation pattern in the main control circuit 44 of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation pattern 21, the fluctuation pattern 22, the fluctuation pattern 31, the fluctuation pattern 32, and the fluctuation pattern 4 as a collective fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 51 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is the front view of the special symbol display apparatus 6 showing the selection screen in the fluctuation pattern 51 and the fluctuation pattern 52 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 52 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is the front view of the special symbol display apparatus 6 showing the selection screen in the fluctuation pattern 61 and the fluctuation pattern 62 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 61 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern 62 as a division | segmentation fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display main control process which the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment performs. It is a list figure of the random number handled in the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern display process which the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern main part selection process which the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment performs. 40A is a timing chart from the start to stop of the change of the divided change pattern of this embodiment, and FIG. 40B is the operation time of the determination button 51 of this embodiment, the change pattern main part, and the second effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the extraction of a character, and the appearance rate of a 2nd production character. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the 1st effect character and 2nd effect character of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each division | segmentation fluctuation pattern 51,52,61,62 and the 1st effect character determination counter C11 in the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 51, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 1 (forest). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 51 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14. Pattern main part group 2 (sea)). FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 52, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 3 (forest). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 52 and the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 4 (sea)). FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 61 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14. Pattern main part group 5 (soccer). Explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the division | segmentation fluctuation pattern 61 in the display control circuit 111 of this embodiment, the counter C12 for 2nd effect character determination, the counter C13 for 2nd effect character appearance, and the counter C14 for change pattern main part determination (change) Pattern main group 6 (baseball)). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the divided variation pattern 61, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main group 7 (kendo)). FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 62, the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main part group 8 (soccer). FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 62 and the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main group 9 (baseball)). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the divided variation pattern 62 and the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 in the display control circuit 111 of the present embodiment. Pattern main group 10 (kendo)).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
1 is an overall front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a front view of a special symbol display device 6, and FIG. 3 is a principal block diagram of a gaming machine control device 100 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram showing the relationship between the main control circuit 44 and the display control circuit 111 constituting the gaming machine control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 22 fixed to a game island (not shown) and an inner frame 23 attached to the outer frame 22. The game board 21 that provides the player with a pachinko game, the hitting operation handle 2 that operates the hitting ball launching device 43 to be described later when operated by the player, and the game ball launched by the hitting ball launching device 43 are guided. A striking ball guide rail 3 to be played, a game region forming rail 4 provided so that the launched game ball flies within a certain range, a game region 5 surrounded by the striking ball guiding rail 3 and the game region forming rail 4, A liquid crystal display that performs a pseudo display (hereinafter also referred to as a scroll display) showing a state in which a special symbol is rotated, and a windmill 20 that changes a game ball launched into the game area 5 in an unexpected direction. A special symbol display device 6 constituted by (LCD) or the like, a start winning opening (electric tulip) 11 for causing the special symbol display device 6 to start a variable symbol display (scroll display) when a game ball wins, When the special symbol display device 6 displays the variation of the special symbol and the game ball wins the start winning opening 11 (hereinafter, such a game ball is also referred to as a holding ball), after the variation display is finished, Four hold LEDs 25 (25a, 25b, 25c, 25d, see FIG. 2) for sequentially displaying the turn-on display of the hold memory for informing the player of whether to change the number of times (up to four times) and the special symbol display device 6 A display unit 30 for displaying a predetermined image, a left symbol display unit 8, a middle symbol display unit 9, a right symbol display unit 10 for individually displaying three special symbols on the display unit 30, and a special symbol display unit 10. When the display result on the handle display device 6 is in a predetermined mode (big hit), a large winning opening (attacker) 7 that is advantageously opened to the player and a game ball for supplying the game ball to the ball hitting device 43 The striking ball supply tray 12, the surplus ball receiving tray 13 that can store the balls that cannot fit in the striking ball supply tray 12, and can move the game balls to a storage ball box (not shown), and the striking ball supply tray 12 2 and a push type determination button 51 for determining the position of the cross switch 50 and the pointer 52 for moving the arrow pointer 52 shown in FIG. A normal winning port 14 for paying out a prize ball, a game effect lamp 15 for notifying a prize ball for payout, a ball jam, and an abnormality, and a game ball provided at the bottom of the game area 5 When the out symbol 16 is collected, the glass door frame 17 is provided so as to be freely opened and closed, and a single-digit normal symbol is displayed, and the normal symbol is a predetermined normal symbol (winning), the start winning port 11 A normal symbol display device 18 composed of a 7-segment LED or the like that opens the blades of the electric tulip, and a normal symbol operation gate 19 that causes the normal symbol display device 18 to start displaying a variation of the normal symbol when the game ball passes. When the normal symbol display device 18 displays the variation of the normal symbol and the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate 19 (hereinafter, such a game ball is also referred to as a pass-holding ball), the variation display is finished. Later, four on-hold LEDs 26 (26a, 26b, 26c, 26d, etc.) for sequentially displaying the on-hold memory for informing the player of how many times the variable display is to be performed (up to four times). It is constituted by two reference) and.

  In the gaming machine 1 configured as described above, first, a game ball is launched from the hit ball launching device 43 by the operation of the hitting operation handle 2 of the player, and passes between the hit ball guiding rail 3 and the game area forming rail 4. A game ball is launched into the game area 5 on the game board 21. Then, the game ball falls in the game area 5 due to its own weight, and in the process of falling, the game ball is changed in the direction of dropping by a game nail or windmill 20 (not shown) implanted in the game board 21, In the case where the normal winning opening 14 is won, the normal symbol operating gate 19 is passed, or all the winning holes are not won, the winning hole 16 is collected.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening 11, a predetermined prize ball is given to the player, and the game ball is detected by a start winning detection sensor 116 described later, and each symbol display unit 8 of the special symbol display device 6 is detected. , 9, 10 are scroll-displayed, and after a predetermined time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol display unit 8, the right symbol display unit 10, and the middle symbol display unit 9, and the left symbol display unit 8 When the special symbol of the right symbol display unit 10 stops and the special symbol combination that constitutes the big hit (for example, the special symbol of the left symbol display unit 8 and the special symbol of the right symbol display unit 10 are the same) Special symbol combination), reach is reached, and a predetermined reach action is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6, and then the special symbol of the middle symbol display unit 9 is stopped. Sure If the displayed special symbol is a combination of predetermined special symbols, it will be a big hit, and the attacker as the big prize opening 7 will be opened in a predetermined manner. In some cases, it will be off. In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the process of variably displaying the special symbol on the special symbol display device 6, when a predetermined gaming state is reached, for example, when reaching a reach, the player is given a specific ratio. The design variation pattern can be selected by moving the pointer 52 to a desired position using the cross switch 50 and pressing the decision button 51.

  Further, when the game ball wins the normal winning opening 14, a predetermined prize ball is given to the player. When the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate 19, the game ball is detected by an operation gate detection sensor 121, which will be described later, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 18, and a lottery is performed to confirm the display. When the normal symbol is a normal symbol determined in advance, it is a win and the blades of the start winning opening (electric tulip) 11 are opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the gaming machine control device 100 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming machine control device 100 is configured as shown in FIG. 3, and the main control circuit 44 mainly constituting the gaming machine control device 100 includes an input circuit 101, an output circuit 110, a one-chip microcomputer 27, and a bus connecting them. 115 (data bus, address bus, control bus, etc.), and the one-chip microcomputer 27 is connected to the output circuit 110 on the basis of signals from the sensors and switches acquired via the input circuit 101. A predetermined control program for controlling various circuits and devices is executed. The one-chip microcomputer 27 includes a CPU 102 that executes a control program, a ROM 103 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 102, and a RAM 104 that temporarily stores data processed by the CPU 102.

  When the winning of the game ball provided in the start winning opening 11 is detected in the input circuit 101, a start winning detection sensor 116 that sends a special symbol variation start signal (hereinafter also referred to as a start signal), and the start winning opening 11 is won. A count switch 123 that detects a game ball, an operation gate detection sensor 121 that sends a normal symbol variation start signal (hereinafter also referred to as an operation signal) when the passage of a game ball provided in the normal symbol operation gate 19 is detected, and a grand prize A count switch 117 that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the grand prize opening 7 by opening the mouth 7, a continuous prize switch 118 that detects a game ball that has passed through a specific area of the big prize opening 7, and a ball-handling operation handle 2 The ball hitting operation handle switch 119 that is turned on when the ball is turned and a game ball is fired, and a pressing operation provided at a predetermined position of the hitting ball operation handle 2 In order to turn off the operation of the hitting ball launching device 43 to stop the launching of the game ball, and to count the game balls won in each winning opening as safe balls and to pay out the game balls as prizes A safe sphere detection sensor 122 that outputs a necessary safe signal is connected.

  The output circuit 110 includes a lamp control circuit 37 that controls lighting / flashing of LEDs (for example, the hold LED 25 and the hold LED 26) and various display lamps (for example, the game effect lamp 15) provided on the game board surface, and a grand prize. A solenoid 106 for opening the attacker as the mouth 7, a solenoid 107 for opening the electric tulip as the start winning opening 11, and a voice for performing voice control for amplifying various sound effects from the speaker 113. The control circuit 38 is connected to an external information terminal 109 connected to a hall management computer or the like (not shown).

  Furthermore, the payout control circuit 40 and the display control circuit 111 are connected to the output circuit 110. The payout control circuit 40 includes a payout control CPU (not shown), a RAM having a storage area for storing the work area of the payout control CPU, the number of prize balls corresponding to each prize ball command, and the like. And a ROM in which control data, a control program for paying out a prize ball, and the like are stored. The payout control circuit 40 drives and controls the prize ball payout device 41 according to the prize ball command instructed from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44, and performs prize ball payout control. In addition, the payout control circuit 40 is connected to a hitting ball launching device 43 for emitting a pachinko ball toward the game area 5 via the launching control circuit 42. And control.

  Next, the display control circuit 111 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the display control circuit 111 includes a CPU 140 that executes a display control program therein, a ROM 142 that stores a display control program executed by the CPU 140, and a RAM 141 that is built in the CPU 140 that forms a work area of the CPU 140. ing. The display control circuit 111 stores VDP 143 that controls an image displayed on the special symbol display device 6 as an LCD, display control data (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to each command read by the VDP 143, and characters, symbols, backgrounds, etc. A VRAM 144 having a storage area for temporarily storing and holding the image data processed by the CGROM 145 and the VDP 143 for the image data is provided.

  That is, the display control circuit 111 receives a control signal such as a one-way strobe signal or a display control command signal from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44 via an input circuit (not shown). The control CPU 140 recognizes the display control command. Then, the VDP 143 reads display control data and characters, symbols, backgrounds, and the like from the data area corresponding to the display control command from the CGROM 145 and stores them in the VRAM 144 that temporarily stores the image data. The VDP 143 reads the stored image data from the VRAM 144 when the display order is reached, and displays the image data on the LCD (special symbol display device 6) in a predetermined manner in response to a command from the CPU 140.

  The display control circuit 111 is connected with a cross switch 50 and an enter button 51 as operation means via an input circuit (not shown), and a pointer 52 is displayed on the LCD (special symbol) corresponding to the player's operation of the cross switch 50. The movement is displayed on the display device 6), and the predetermined variation pattern is variably displayed on the LCD (special symbol display device 6) as described above in response to the pressing operation of the determination button 51 by the player.

  The display control circuit 111 includes a RAM and a VRAM backup 146 that can retain the stored contents of the RAM 141 and the VRAM 144 even when the power is turned off. Further, the CPU 140 is connected to the CPU 140 via a driver circuit (not shown). Thus, a normal symbol display device 18 as a 7-segment LED is connected. The main control circuit 44 has a RAM backup 130 circuit that can retain the stored contents of the RAM 104 even when the power is turned off, similar to the display control circuit 111. Further, the main control circuit 44 is externally connected to the main control circuit 44. A test terminal for testing the contents of 44, such as a connector, is also provided.

  Thus, if the RAM 104 of the main control circuit 44 and the RAM 141 and VRAM 144 of the display control circuit 111 have a backup function capable of retaining stored contents even when the power is turned off, for example, lightning occurs nearby. Even if the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is suddenly cut off due to a surge current entering the gaming machine 1 or the like, the RAM 104 of the main control circuit 44, the RAM 141 of the display control circuit 111, and the VRAM 144 are related to the game. Since all the data is preserved, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored, the game can be resumed from the previous gaming state, and the game arcade can provide a fair game to the player, while the player can, for example, Even if the power is cut off in an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to continue the advantageous gaming state after the power is restored, so there is an unexpected disadvantage Avoidance can, a marked effect for both. In addition to the RAM 104 of the main control circuit 44 and the RAM 141 and VRAM 144 of the display control circuit 111, this backup function is also provided in the RAM of other control circuits such as the RAM of the payout control circuit 40 that controls the payout of the prize balls. May be. Further, the above-described RAM 141 may not be built in the CPU 140 and may be external to the CPU 140.

  Further, the control signal (strobe signal, command signal, etc.) is unidirectionally communicated from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, that is, by eliminating the input from the display control circuit 111 to the main control circuit 44. In addition, by inputting the input of the operation means (cross switch 50 and determination button 51) directly to the display control circuit 111 without passing through the main control circuit 44, the main control circuit governing the main control of the gaming machine 1 as a whole. The number of inputs to 44 can be reduced, and illegal signal inputs to the main control circuit 44 can be eliminated as much as possible. The game arcade can provide appropriate games to the player, and the circuit configuration and program related to communication between the two can be simplified. It is easy to develop and produce the gaming machine 1 and has the remarkable effect of reducing the cost. Note that the one-way communication from the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44 is not limited to the display control circuit 111 as shown in FIG. 3 but also to other control circuits such as the payout control circuit 40 for paying out the prize balls. To do.

  The normal symbol display device 18 connected to the display control circuit 111 may be directly connected to the output circuit 110 of the main control circuit 44, or the lamp control circuit directly connected to the output circuit 110 of the main control circuit 44. 37 and the audio control circuit 38 may be connected to the display control circuit 111 or the payout control circuit 40. Furthermore, the hitting operation handle switch 119 and the hitting operation stop switch 120 connected to the input circuit 101 may be directly connected to the launch control circuit 42 or the payout control circuit 40. These may be appropriately designed according to the functions and arrangement of various devices constituting the gaming machine control device 100, the processing speed of each CPU, the capacity of a storage device such as ROM, RAM, and the like.

  In the gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the gaming machine control device 100 performs overall control of the gaming machine 1 by executing the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIG. Various images corresponding thereto are displayed on the special symbol display device 6 or the like. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a main game process (main routine) executed by the CPU 102 of the main control circuit 44. Immediately after the power is turned on, the CPU 102 performs initialization processing (step S10), and initializes flags, registers, and storage areas necessary for stack setting and the following processing. When the CPU 102 finishes the initialization process in step S10, the process proceeds to the random number update process in step S20. The CPU 102 executes a main routine (each program stored in the ROM 103 of the main control circuit 44), that is, each process of Step S20 to Step S60 described below, every reset interrupt (4 msec).

  FIG. 6 is a list of random numbers handled by the main control circuit 44. In the main control circuit 44, as shown in FIG. 6, various counters C1 to C10 (random numbers 1 to 10) are set as random numbers for setting the game mode at random. CPU102 updates the value regarding each counter C1-C10 by the random number update process of step S20. The jackpot determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314) is a random number counter that draws whether or not a special symbol combination is a jackpot (details will be described later. ) And starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C1 becomes 315, it is rewritten to 0.

  Random number counter for determining the stop symbol of a special symbol is a random number that creates an off symbol other than the jackpot symbol, which will be described later, as a special symbol combination (including a case where the symbol is disengaged after reaching reach; Counters for left stop symbol determination C2 (random numbers 2, 0 to 13), middle stop symbol determination counter C3 (random numbers 3, 0 to 13), right stop symbol determination counter C4 (random numbers 4, 0 to 13) 13) is provided.

  The left stop symbol determination counter C2 is a counter used to create a symbol for the left symbol, starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when the random number counter C2 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0. The middle stop symbol determination counter C3 is a counter used to create a middle symbol, starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) each time the left stop symbol determination counter C2 is set to zero. The However, when the random number counter C3 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0. The right stop symbol determination counter C4 is a counter used to create a right symbol design, and starts from 0 when the power is turned on. The However, when this random number counter C4 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent the left, middle and right symbols from being synchronized.

  The reach determination counter C5 (random numbers 5, 0 to 11) is a random number counter (to be described later in detail, the reach is 3 when the special symbol combination is used as an out-of-band design). The probability is 1/12), which starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when the random number counter C5 becomes 12, it is rewritten to 0.

  The reach symbol mode determination counter C6 (random numbers 6, 0 to 62) displays the special symbol that the middle symbol display unit 9 stops when the combination of special symbols is out of reach, the left symbol display unit 8 and the right symbol display It is assumed that the same special symbol that the unit 10 stops is plus or minus 1 (which will be described later, in this embodiment, each special symbol displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 is For example, when the special symbol stopped in the left symbol display unit 8 and the right symbol display unit 10 is 3, the special symbol that the middle symbol display unit 9 stops is displayed. 4 (plus 1) or 2 (minus 1), hereinafter, a random number counter (to be described in detail later) for determining whether or not such a special symbol that the middle symbol display unit 9 stops is also referred to as plus or minus 1 symbol) But Reach out if the plus or minus 1 pattern of to 19, a probability 20/63), starting from power-on 0, is incremented (1 is added) to each reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C6 becomes 63, it is rewritten to 0.

  The jackpot symbol determination counter C7 (random numbers 7, 0 to 13) is a random number counter that creates a jackpot symbol as a combination of special symbols. The counter is started from 0 when the power is turned on and is incremented every reset interrupt (4 msec) (1 Added). However, when the random number counter C7 becomes 14, it is rewritten to 0.

  The variation pattern determining counter C8 (random numbers 8, 0 to 51) is a random number counter for lottery of which variation pattern is adopted as the above reach action when the combination of special symbols is a big hit or the reach is lost. Starting from 0 when the power is turned on, it is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C8 becomes 52, it is rewritten to 0.

  The hit determination counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30) is a random number counter that draws a lottery to determine whether or not to win a normal symbol (which will be described in detail later. ) And starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C9 becomes 31, it is rewritten to 0.

  The off symbol determining counter C10 (random numbers 10, 0 to 8) is a counter used for creating a normal symbol off symbol, starting from 0 when the power is turned on, and incrementing (adding 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). Is done. However, when the random number counter C10 becomes 9, it is rewritten to 0.

  Returning to FIG. 5, when the CPU 102 finishes the random number update process in step S <b> 20, the CPU 102 proceeds to the normal game process in step S <b> 30. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the normal game process (step S30). The normal game process is composed of the operation gate passing process in step S450 and the normal symbol game process in S500. First, the operation gate passing process in step S450 will be described.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation gate passing process. When the operation gate passage process is started, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol operation gate 19 is detected (operation signal input to the operation gate detection sensor 121) (step S452). If a game ball has not been detected (NO in step S452), the operation gate passing process is terminated and the routine proceeds to the normal symbol game process (FIG. 10) in S500. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected (YES in step S452), CPU 102 proceeds to the process in step S454 and determines whether the value of counter A is less than 5. The counter A is a counter set in the main control circuit 44 to store the number of reserved memories (the number of retained balls passed) of the hold LED 26 (see FIG. 2), and the operation gate detection sensor 121 is a normal symbol operation gate 19. When a game ball passing through is detected, the minimum value is changed from 0 to a maximum value of 5. When the power is turned on, the value is initialized and a minimum value of 0 is set.

If NO in step S454, that is, if the counter A is a value of 5 or more, the CPU 102 ends the operation gate passing process. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S454, that is, if the counter A has a value of 0 to 4, the process proceeds to the process of step S456, and the CPU 102 increments the value of the counter A (add 1) based on the operation signal described above. Then, the process proceeds to step S458 to execute a random number acquisition process. When the CPU 102 proceeds to the random number acquisition process in step S458, the CPU 102 acquires the current values of the counters C9 and C10 described above and stores them in the acquired numerical value storage areas of the RAM 104, respectively. When the random number acquisition process in step S458 ends, the CPU 102 proceeds to the hold LED lighting control process in step S464.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the hold LED lighting control process (step S464). When the hold LED lighting control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines in the process of step S466 whether or not the value of the counter A is 2 or more (NO in step S466), that is, When the value of the counter A is 0 or 1, the hold LED lighting control process is terminated. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S466, that is, if the value of the counter A is 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S468, and the CPU 102 has four hold LEDs 26a, 26b, 26c, and 26d (see FIG. 2), the lamp control circuit 37 is driven to light up, and the hold LED lighting control process is terminated.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol game process (step S500). When the normal symbol game process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter A is 1 or more in the process of step S501, and if not (1 in step S501), that is, the counter If the value of A is 0, the normal symbol game process is terminated and the process proceeds to the process of step S40 of the main game process (FIG. 5). On the other hand, when the value of the counter A is 1 or more in the process of step S501 (YES in step S501), the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S502 and sets a value in the hit flag F4.

The main control circuit 44 is set with a hit flag F4, and the hit flag F4 is set to 0 when the power is turned on. Then, in the random number acquisition process of step S458 described above, when the acquired numerical value of the counter for counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30) is 0 to 9, the CPU 102 sets 1 to the hit flag F4. If the acquired numerical value of the counter for counter C9 is not 0 to 9, that is, 10 to 30, the hit flag F4 remains 0. Therefore, the hit probability in this case is 10/31, and the probability of loss is 20/31. When the CPU 102 completes the process of setting the hit flag F4 in step S502, the CPU 102 proceeds to a normal symbol determination process in step S503.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the random number value of the off symbol determination counter C10 (0 to 8) and the normal symbol (one-digit normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 composed of 7-segment LEDs). FIG. When the CPU 102 proceeds to the normal symbol determination process in step S503, the CPU 102 determines the normal symbol that is fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display device 18. If 1 is set in the winning flag F4 (if it is a winning), the CPU 102 determines the number symbol “7” as the winning symbol. On the other hand, if 0 is set in the hit flag F4, an off symbol (for example, “2” if C10 = 2) corresponding to the acquired numerical value of the off symbol determining counter C10 (0 to 8) shown in FIG. The normal symbol determination process in step S503 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the normal symbol control process in step S504.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol control process (step S504). When this normal symbol control process is executed, the CPU 102 first executes a normal symbol variation display process in the process of step S506. In the normal symbol variation display process of step S506, in order to display the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process of step S503 described above on the normal symbol display device 18 after the variable display, the CPU 102 Output transmission data.

  That is, this transmission data is output from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, and from the start of fluctuation of the single-digit normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 composed of 7-segment LEDs. It is defined that two commands are transmitted as display control commands before the confirmation display. For these two commands, the normal symbol designating command for designating the normal symbol change start and the normal symbol stop design is sent first, and then the normal symbol stop designating command for designating the normal design stop is used for the above normal symbol designating. It is configured to be transmitted when time t has elapsed since the command was transmitted. Therefore, this time t is the normal symbol change time, that is, the time from when the normal symbol starts changing to the normal symbol display device 18 until it stops. The normal symbol variation time t is set to 30 seconds at normal times.

  Ten types of normal symbol designation commands are prepared corresponding to the normal symbols (0 to 9), and a stop symbol (determined symbol) is designated. One type of the normal symbol stop designation command is prepared, and the normal symbol stop timing is instructed. The normal symbol designation command and the normal symbol stop designation command described above are transmitted from the main control circuit 44 and received by the display control circuit 111, so that the normal symbol starts to fluctuate and is displayed after being stopped. The fluctuation display of the times is normally displayed by the symbol display device 18.

  When the normal symbol variation display process of step S506 is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S508, and determines whether or not the above-described normal symbol variation time t is up (t = 0). If NO in step S508, that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol variation time t has not timed up, the CPU 102 ends the normal symbol control process (step S504) and performs the process in step S512. Migrate to On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S508, that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol variation time t has timed up, the process proceeds to the normal symbol fixed display process of step S510.

  When the process proceeds to step S510, the CPU 102 executes a process of confirming and displaying the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process of step S503 on the normal symbol display device 18 as described above. Then, when the process of step S510 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the normal symbol control process and proceeds to the process of step S512.

  When the process proceeds to step S512, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display device 18, and if it is not fixedly displayed (NO in step S512), the normal symbol is displayed. The symbol game process (step S500) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S512 that the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 (YES in step S512), the CPU 102 proceeds to the process in step S514. It is determined whether or not the value of flag F4 is 1, and if it is 1 (YES in step S514), the process proceeds to step S516, and the start winning opening releasing process is executed.

  In step S516, the CPU 102 executes a start winning opening opening process shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning opening opening process (step S516). When this start winning opening opening process is executed, the CPU 102 first controls the solenoid 107 to open the blades of the starting winning opening (electric tulip) 11 in the process of step S518. Then, the process proceeds to step S520, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the set start winning opening opening time ST is up (ST = 0). Accordingly, this time ST is the opening time of the start winning opening, that is, the time from when the starting winning opening 11 opens the blade until it closes. The start winning opening opening time ST is normally set to 0.2 seconds. If NO in step S520, that is, if it is determined that the start winning opening release time ST has not timed up, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S522 and the value of the counter G is 6 or more. It is determined whether or not.

This counter G counts the main control circuit 44 in order to count the number of game balls won in the start winning opening 11 until the opened winning opening 11 is closed after the start winning opening 11 elapses. Is counted up when the count switch 123 detects a game ball, and is initialized and set to 0 when the power is turned on.

  If NO in step S522, that is, if the value of the counter G is determined to be less than 6, the start winning opening releasing process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S528. On the other hand, when it is determined YES in the process of step S520 or the process of step S522, that is, when it is determined that the start winning opening opening time ST has expired or when the value of the counter G is determined to be 6 or more, In step S524, the CPU 102 drives and controls the solenoid 107 to close the blades of the start winning port 11. Then, the process proceeds to step S525, and the CPU 102 sets the value of the counter G to 0, proceeds to the process in step S526, sets the value of the winning flag F4 to 0, and this start winning opening releasing process. (Step S516) is ended, and the process proceeds to Step S528.

  When the process proceeds to step S528, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the winning flag F4 is 0, that is, whether or not all predetermined start winning opening opening processing (step S516) is completed, and the value of the winning flag F4 is determined. Is not 0 (NO in step S528), that is, in the case of 1, it is determined that all the predetermined start winning opening opening processing has not ended, and this normal symbol game processing (step S500) is ended. On the other hand, when the value of winning flag F4 is 0 (YES in step S528), CPU 102 determines that all the predetermined start winning port opening processes have been completed, and proceeds to the process of step S530. On the other hand, if the value of the hit flag F4 is not 1 in the process of step S514 (NO in step S514), that is, if the value of the hit flag F4 is 0, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S530. . After shifting to the process of step S530, the CPU 102 decrements (decrements 1) the value of the counter A incremented (added by 1) in the process of step S456 (FIG. 8) described above, and shifts to the process of step S532. The hold LED extinguishing control process is executed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the hold LED extinguishing control process (step S532). When the hold LED extinguishing control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter A is 1 or more in the process of step S534. If the value of the counter A is not 1 or more (in step S534) NO), that is, if the value of the counter A is 0, the hold LED extinguishing control process is terminated, the normal symbol game process (step S500) is terminated, and the process of step S40 of the main game process (FIG. 5) Migrate to On the other hand, if YES in step S534, that is, if the value of the counter A is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S536, and the CPU 102 selects one of the four hold LEDs 26a, 26b, 26c, and 26d. The corresponding one is driven to turn off the lamp control circuit 37, and the hold LED turn-off control process is finished.

  Returning to FIG. 5, when the normal game process (step S30) is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S40 and executes the special game process. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special game process. The special game process includes a start winning opening winning process in step S300 and a special symbol game process in step S318. First, the starting winning opening winning process in step S300 will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning opening winning process. When the start winning award winning process is started, the CPU 102 determines whether or not a game ball won in the start winning award 11 is detected (start signal input from the start winning detection sensor 116) (step S302). If no game ball has been detected (NO in step S302), the start winning opening winning process is terminated and the process proceeds to a special game process in step S318. On the other hand, when a game ball is detected (YES in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304 to determine whether the value of counter B is less than 5. This counter B is the same as the counter A described above, and is a counter set in the main control circuit 44 to store the number of reserved memories (the number of held balls) of the hold LED 25, and the start winning detection sensor 116 is started. When a game ball that has won a prize opening 11 is detected, the game ball changes from a minimum value 0 to a maximum value 5, and is initialized and a minimum value 0 is set when the power is turned on.

  If NO in step S304, that is, if the counter B has a value of 5 or more, the start winning opening winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S304, that is, if the counter B has a value of 0 to 4, the process proceeds to the process of step S306, and the CPU 102 increments the value of the counter B based on the start signal described above (add 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S308 to execute a random number acquisition process. When the CPU 102 proceeds to the random number acquisition process in step S308, the CPU 102 acquires the current values of the counters C1, C5, C6, and C8 from the counters C1 to C10 described above and stores them in the acquired numerical value storage area of the RAM 104, respectively. When the random number acquisition process in step S308 ends, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S312 and executes a hold LED lighting control process.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the hold LED lighting control process (step S312). When the hold LED lighting control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter B is 2 or more in the process of step S314. If it is not 2 or more (NO in step S314), that is, When the value of the counter B is 0 or 1, the hold LED lighting control process is terminated and the special symbol game process of step S318 is executed. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S314, that is, if the value of the counter B is 2 or more, the process proceeds to the process of step S316, and the CPU 102 selects one of the four hold LEDs 25a, 25b, 25c, and 25d. The corresponding one is driven to light up by driving the lamp control circuit 37, and the hold LED lighting control process (step S312) is ended.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game process (step S318). When this special symbol game process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter B is 1 or more in the process of step S319. If the value of the counter B is not 1 or more (in step S319) NO), that is, if the value of the counter B is 0, the special symbol game process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the process of step S50 of the main game process (FIG. 5). On the other hand, if the value of counter B is 1 or more in the process of step S319 (YES in step S319), the process proceeds to step S344, and CPU 102 sets a value for each flag.

  Here, as the flags, a big hit flag F1, a reach flag F2 and a reach mode flag F3 are set in the main control circuit 44, and these flags are set to 0 when the power is turned on. In the random number acquisition process in step S308 described above, if the acquired numerical value (hereinafter, simply referred to as “value”) of the jackpot determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314) is 7, the jackpot 1 is set in the flag F1. Note that if the acquired value of the big hit determination counter C1 is not 7, that is, 0 to 6 and 8 to 314, the big hit flag F1 remains 0. Therefore, in this case, the jackpot probability is 1/315, and the probability of loss is 314/315.

  Further, in the random number acquisition process of step S308 described above, if the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 (random numbers 5, 0 to 11) is 3, the reach flag F2 is set to 1. It should be noted that the reach flag F2 remains 0 when the obtained value of the reach determination counter C5 is not 3, that is, 0-2 and 4-11. Therefore, in this case, the probability of detachment of reach is 1/12, and the probability of detachment of non-reach is 11/12.

  Further, in the random number acquisition process of step S308 described above, when the acquired numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 (random numbers 6, 0 to 62) is 0 to 19, 1 is set to the reach mode flag F3. In addition, when the acquisition numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 is 20 to 62, the reach mode flag F3 remains 0. Accordingly, in this case, the probability of reach divergence in which the middle symbol display unit 9 becomes plus / minus one symbol is 20/63, and the probability of reach divergence in which the middle symbol display unit 9 is other than plus / minus one symbol is 43/63. When the CPU 102 completes the process of setting each flag in step S344, the CPU 102 proceeds to the special symbol determination process in step S346.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process (step S346). When the special symbol determination process is executed, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0 in step S347. If the value of the big hit flag F1 is not 0 (NO in step S347), that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 1, the process proceeds to step S353 and is created in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104. Corresponding jackpot symbol data is acquired from the jackpot symbol storage buffer in which the jackpot symbol data is stored.

  20 and 21, a left stop symbol determination counter C2 (random numbers 2, 0 to 13), a middle stop symbol determination counter C3 (random numbers 3, 0 to 13), and a right stop symbol determination counter A special symbol (left symbol display unit 8, middle symbol display unit) as an off symbol or jackpot symbol based on the random number values of C4 (random numbers 4, 0 to 13) and jackpot symbol determination counter C7 (random numbers 7, 0 to 13) 9. A case where each special symbol displayed on the right symbol display unit 10 is created will be described. 20 and 21 show the relationship between the random numbers of the stop symbol determination counters C2, C3, C4 and the jackpot symbol determination counter C7 and the special symbols, and the special symbols are the stop symbol determination counters C2, C3, C4 and It is explanatory drawing which shows the process produced based on the random value of the big hit symbol determination counter C7. First, with reference to FIGS. 20A, 20 </ b> B, 20 </ b> C, and 21 </ b> A, a case where a special symbol combination (including a reach deviation) is created as a special symbol combination will be described.

  The left stop symbol determination counter C2 (random numbers 2, 0 to 13), the middle stop symbol determination counter C3 (random numbers 3, 0 to 13) and the right stop symbol determination counter C4 (random numbers 4, 0 to 13) are respectively As shown in FIGS. 20A, 20B, and 20C, the special symbols 1 to 14 correspond to the random numbers 0 to 13, and are counted up as described in the random number update process in step S20. However, since the process of continuing to update during the remaining time of the main game process is performed by the random number update process of step S60 shown in FIG. 5 described in detail later, each random value is a random value every 4 msec. As a result, each special symbol corresponding to the random value is also created as random data every 4 msec.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21A, the data of each special symbol created to be displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 every 4 msec is stored in the RAM 104. Are stored in a predetermined symbol storage buffer created in the storage area. Here, as the special symbol combination, when the data of the reach out of which the middle symbol display unit 9 becomes plus or minus 1 symbol is created, the reach symbol storing buffer of plus or minus 1 symbol is used as the special symbol combination, When the data of the reach out of which the middle symbol display unit 9 is other than the plus / minus 1 symbol is created, the data of the out of the reach which does not become the reach as the combination of the special symbol is stored in the reach symbol storing buffer other than the plus / minus 1 symbol. When created, each of them is stored in the errant symbol storage buffer that does not become reach, and when the jackpot symbol data shown in FIG. 20 (D) is created as a special symbol combination. , Not to be remembered. In FIG. 21 (A), “1, 2, 1” is a combination of special symbols that are out of reach where the middle symbol display unit 9 becomes plus or minus one symbol, and the middle symbol display unit 9 is other than plus or minus one symbol. As an example, “5, 8, 5” is shown as a combination of the special symbols that are not reachable, and “5, 5, 1” is shown as a combination of the special symbols that are not reach.

  Next, the case where a big hit symbol is created as a combination of special symbols will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (D) and 21 (B). The jackpot symbol determination counter C7 (random numbers 7, 0 to 13) is, as shown in FIG. 20D, jackpot symbols “1, 1, 1” to “14, 14 and 14 ”, and is counted up as described in the random number update process in step S20. The main number is updated by the random number update process in step S60 shown in FIG. Since the process continues to be updated during the remaining time of the game process, the random value takes a random value every 4 msec. As a result, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the random value is also created as random data every 4 msec. .

  As shown in FIG. 21B, the jackpot symbol data created to be displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 every 4 msec is stored in a predetermined memory of the RAM 104. The jackpot symbol storage buffer created in the area is stored while being rewritten. FIG. 21B shows an example of the big hit symbol “5, 5, 5” as a combination of special symbols. In addition, as will be described in detail later, among the jackpot symbols, the odd-numbered numbered symbols (“1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7, 7, 7”, “9” , 9, 9 ”,“ 11, 11, 11 ”,“ 13, 13, 13 ”) is a specific big symbol, and the other even-numbered numbers (“ 2, 2, 2 ”,“ 4, 4, 4 ”) ”“ 6, 6, 6 ”,“ 8, 8, 8 ”,“ 10, 10, 10 ”,“ 12, 12, 12 ”,“ 14, 14, 14 ”) is usually a big bonus symbol. A bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus symbol is usually given.

  Returning to FIG. 19, that is, in the process of step S353, if the big hit flag F1 is set to 1 (in the case of big hit), the CPU 102 reads out the big hit symbol data stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer and reads it out. The jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol data is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104.

  On the other hand, if YES in step S347, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, the process proceeds to step S348, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach flag F2 is 0. If the value of reach flag F2 is 0 (YES in step S348), the process proceeds to step S349, and CPU 102 reads out the missed symbol data stored in the missed symbol storage buffer that does not become reach. The outlier corresponding to the read out outlier symbol data is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S348, that is, if the value of the reach flag F2 is 1, the process proceeds to step S350, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach state flag F3 is 0. If the value of reach state flag F3 is 0 (YES in step S350), the process proceeds to step S351, and CPU 102 loses the data stored in the reach symbol storage buffer other than plus or minus 1 symbols. The symbol data is read out, and a reach out symbol other than the plus or minus 1 symbol corresponding to the read out symbol data is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, and predetermined memory of the RAM 104 is stored. Remember in the area.

  On the other hand, if the value of reach mode flag F3 is not 0 (NO in step S350), that is, if the value of reach mode flag F3 is 1, the process proceeds to step S352, and CPU 102 determines whether plus or minus 1 symbol. Is read out and stored in the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 at this time is stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. The symbol is determined and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104.

When any of steps S349, S351, S352, and S353 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol determination process (step S346), and proceeds to the special symbol control process of step S354. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process (step S354). When this special symbol control process is executed, CPU 102 executes a special symbol variation display process shown in FIG. 23 in step S356.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation display processing (step S356). When the special symbol variation display process is executed, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0 in step S358. If the value of the big hit flag F1 is not 0 (NO in step S358), that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 1, the process proceeds to step S359, and the CPU 102 performs the special symbol determination process described above. It is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol data acquired from the jackpot symbol storage buffer in step S353 of (step S346) is the above-described odd numbered number symbol symbol, that is, whether or not it is a specific bonus symbol. .

  If YES in step S359, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is the specific bonus symbol, the process proceeds to step S360, and the CPU 102 changes the variation pattern 4, the variation pattern 22, the variation pattern 32, A process for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display any one of the fluctuation patterns 52 and 62 is executed. On the other hand, if NO in the process of step S359, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is not a specific bonus symbol (when it is a normal bonus symbol as the above-mentioned even-numbered symbol), step S361 is performed. Shifting to the processing, the CPU 102 executes processing for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display any variation pattern from among the variation pattern 22, the variation pattern 32, the variation pattern 52, and the variation pattern 62.

  On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S358, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, the process proceeds to step S362, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach flag F2 is 0. If the value of the reach flag F2 is 0 (YES in step S362), that is, the symbol data acquired this time is stored so that it does not become reach in step S349 of the special symbol determination process (step S346) described above. If it is out-of-order symbol data acquired from the buffer, the process proceeds to step S363, and the CPU 102 executes processing for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display the variation pattern 1.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S362, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F2 is 1, the process proceeds to step S364, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the reach state flag F3 is zero. If the value of reach state flag F3 is 0 (YES in step S364), that is, the symbol data acquired this time is other than plus or minus one symbol in step S351 of the special symbol determination process (step S346) described above. If the reach symbol data obtained from the reach symbol storage buffer is obtained, the process proceeds to step S365, and the CPU 102 performs processing for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display the variation pattern 21 or the variation pattern 31. Execute.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S364, that is, if the value of the reach state flag F3 is 1, that is, the symbol data acquired this time is plus or minus 1 in step S352 of the special symbol determination process (step S346) described above. If the reach reach symbol data acquired from the symbol reach symbol storage buffer step is reached, the process proceeds to step S366, and the CPU 102 determines whether the variation pattern 21, the variation pattern 31, the variation pattern 51, or the variation pattern 61 is within the range. From this, a process for instructing the display control circuit 111 to display one of the variation patterns is executed.

  As will be described in detail later, in the processing of step S360, step S361, step S365, and step S366, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns in the random number acquisition processing in step S308. The variation pattern determination counter C8 (random number 8, 0 to 51) is determined.

  When the processing of step S360, step S361, step S365, or step S366 is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S367 and executes the LED / lamp lighting control processing. In this LED / lamp lighting control process (step S367), the CPU 102 drives the above-described lamp control circuit 37 to turn on or blink the LED, lamp, etc. provided on the game board surface in a predetermined manner. Execute. By this processing, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol display device 6 has displayed the variation pattern related to the big hit or the reach, and it is possible to improve the performance level of the game.

  When the LED / lamp lighting control process in step S367 or the process for instructing the display of the fluctuation pattern 1 in step S363 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol fluctuation display process (step S356) and proceeds to the process in step S369. Transition.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation display displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 by the display control circuit 111 that has received a variation pattern display instruction from the main control circuit 44 will be described. . FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of transmitted data as a change pattern display instruction transmitted from the main control circuit 44 and received by the display control circuit 111 that controls the special symbol display device 6. The main control circuit 44 uses the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation display process in step S356 for the special symbol (stop symbol) determined in the special symbol determination processing in step S346 to the left of the special symbol display device 6. The transmission data shown in FIG. 24 is output for a fixed display after variable display (scroll display) on the symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10.

  This transmission data is output from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, and is confirmed from the start of fluctuation of the special symbols displayed by the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 of the special symbol display device 6. Until then, it is specified that five commands are transmitted as display control commands. As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, these five commands are first transmitted with a variation pattern designation command, then with a left special symbol designation command, and subsequently with a right special symbol designation command, A medium special symbol designation command and all symbol stop designation commands are transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the five special commands are transmitted when the time T1 elapses after the first variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the left special symbol designation command is The right special symbol designation command is transmitted when the time T2 has elapsed since the transmission, and the middle special symbol designation command is transmitted when the time T3 has elapsed since the right special symbol designation command has been transmitted. The all symbol stop designation command is transmitted when the time T has elapsed after the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. Therefore, this time T is a special symbol variation time, that is, a time from when the special symbol (the left special symbol, the middle special symbol, and the right special symbol) starts to fluctuate on the special symbol display device 6 until it stops. The special symbol variation time T is normally set to 7 to 42 seconds (13 to 42 seconds for a big hit or reach, and 7 seconds for others).

  The variation pattern designation command transmitted first includes the value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 (random numbers 8, 0 to 51) acquired in the random number acquisition process in step S308 and the flags (big hit flag F1, reach flag). F2 and reach mode flag F3) are sent based on the current values of fluctuation pattern 1, fluctuation pattern 21, fluctuation pattern 22, fluctuation pattern 31, fluctuation pattern 32, fluctuation pattern 4, fluctuation pattern 51 as described above. 10 types of variation pattern 52, variation pattern 61 and variation pattern 62 are prepared, and the variation state (variation pattern and variation time) of all symbols is indicated. When this is transmitted, the variation of the special symbol is started. The contents of these ten types of variation patterns will be described in detail later.

  There are 14 types of left special symbol designation commands corresponding to the left special symbols 1 to 14 shown in FIG. 12, and the stop symbol (determined symbol) in the left column is instructed. There are 14 types of right special symbol designating commands corresponding to the right special symbols 1 to 14 shown in FIG. 12, and the stop symbol (determined symbol) in the right column is instructed. There are 14 types of medium special symbol designation commands corresponding to 1 to 14 of the medium special symbols shown in FIG. 12, and the stop symbol (determined symbol) in the middle row is instructed. One type of all symbol stop designation commands is prepared, and the stop timing of special symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column is instructed. The above variation pattern designation command, left special symbol designation command, right special symbol designation command, middle special symbol designation command and all symbol stop designation command are transmitted from the main control circuit 44 and received by the display control circuit 111. One change display from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed after being stopped is displayed by each of the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 of the special symbol display device 6.

  That is, the special symbol change display (scroll display) displayed on the special symbol display device 6 has different times until the respective symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 stop changing, Sometimes, each symbol display unit 8, 9, 10 is performed simultaneously. When the fluctuation is stopped, the left symbol display unit 8 is first stopped, then the right symbol display unit 10 is stopped, and finally the middle symbol display unit 9 is It comes to stop. When the left symbol display unit 8 and then the right symbol display unit 10 are stopped based on the variation pattern related to the big hit or the reach, when a reach that has the same special symbol appears, the special symbol display device 6 On the display unit 30, various effects (reach actions) that make the player entertained are performed using the characters stored in the CGROM 145 of the display control circuit 111.

  In addition, the aspect until each symbol display part 8,9,10 stops from a fluctuation | variation start may be other than above, and various aspects can be considered. For example, a time difference may be provided when each of the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 starts changing, or may be stopped simultaneously when each of the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 stops changing. Furthermore, the order in which the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 start changing may be changed, or the order in which the symbol display units 8, 9, and 10 stop changing may be changed. In addition, such various modes may be mixed so that the player is notified that the result of the variation display will be a big hit or reach. If it does in this way, according to the aspect from a change start to a stop, a player can assume what kind of result this change display will become, gameability will improve, and a player's willingness to play will increase.

  In addition, the special symbol stop means not only the state where it is completely stopped, but also a state where, for example, several frames are slightly moved up and down on each of the symbol display portions 8, 9, 10 (hereinafter, this state is referred to as such). Also referred to as “shake”). That is, the special symbol may be stopped in any manner as long as the player can recognize the special symbol even if the special symbol is not completely stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 22, when the process proceeds to step S <b> 369, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time T (see FIG. 24) is up (T = 0). If NO in step S369, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation time T has not timed up, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol control process (step S354) and performs the process in step S374. Migrate to On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S369, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation time T has timed up, the process proceeds to the special symbol confirmation display process of step S370.

  When the process proceeds to the process of step S370, the CPU 102 executes a process of confirming and displaying the special symbol determined in the special symbol determination process of step S346 on the special symbol display device 6 as described above, and proceeds to the process of step S371. Then, the value of the reach flag F2 is set to 0, the process proceeds to step S372, and the value of the reach mode flag F3 is set to 0. In addition, when it determines with YES by the process of the said step S348 and step S362, and when it has determined with YES by the process of said step S350 and step S364, CPU102 performs the process of step S371 and step S372. , Do nothing. When the process of step S372 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the special symbol control process (step S354).

  When the process proceeds to step S374, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the special symbol is fixedly displayed on the special symbol display device 6 here, and if it is not fixedly displayed (NO in step S374), the special symbol is displayed. The symbol game process (step S318) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S374 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 (YES in step S374), the process proceeds to step S380, and the CPU 102 receives the big hit here. It is determined whether or not the value of the flag F1 is 1. If NO in step S380, that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S434. On the other hand, when the value of big hit flag F1 is 1 (YES in step S380), the process proceeds to step S381, and the process of canceling the probability change process is executed. Note that the probability change process cancellation process in step S381 is a process for canceling the process set in the probability change process in step S412 to be described later and returning it to the normal setting, and detailed description thereof is omitted here. In short, the hit determination counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30), the normal symbol variation time t, the start winning opening opening time ST, the big hit determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314), and In this process, each content of the special symbol variation time T is returned to the normal setting. Accordingly, when the probability changing process of step S412 described later is not executed, nothing is processed here. When the process of canceling the probability change process in step S381 is completed, the process proceeds to step S391, and the CPU 102 executes the jackpot process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the big hit process (step S391). When the jackpot process (step S391) is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the interval time is in the process of step S392. This interval time is the time during which the big winning opening (attacker) 7 provided during each round during the so-called jackpot game is closed. ) Ends the jackpot process (step S391) and proceeds to the process of step S410. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S392 that the interval time is not reached (NO in step S392), the process proceeds to step S394.

In step S394, the CPU 102 controls the solenoid 106 to open the special winning opening 7. Then, the process proceeds to step S396, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the preset opening time 30 of the predetermined prize winning opening 7 has expired, and NO in the process of step S396, that is, If it is determined that the opening time 30 seconds of the big prize opening 7 has not expired, the process proceeds to step S398 to determine whether the value of the counter D is 10 or more. The counter D is a main control circuit 44 for counting the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 7 until the opened big prize opening 7 is closed after the opening time of the big prize opening 30 seconds elapses. Is counted up when the count switch 117 detects a game ball, and is initialized and set to 0 when the power is turned on.

  If NO in step S398, that is, if the value of the counter D is determined to be less than 10, the CPU 102 ends the jackpot process. On the other hand, if it is determined as YES in the process of step S396 or the process of step S398, that is, if it is determined that the opening time 30 seconds of the special winning opening 7 has expired, or the value of the counter D is determined to be 10 or more. If YES in step S400, the process advances to step S400, and the CPU 102 drives and controls the solenoid 106 to close the special winning opening 7. Then, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S401, sets the value of the counter D to 0, proceeds to the process of step S402, and increments (adds 1) the value of the counter E. This counter E is a counter set in the main control circuit 44 in order to count how many times the big winning opening 7 is opened, in other words, how many times each round in the big hit game is executed. Every time the process of step S400 is executed and the special winning opening 7 is closed, the count is incremented. When the power is turned on, it is initialized and 0 is set.

  When the process of step S402 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S404, and the CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous winning switch 118 is turned on, that is, the game ball that has passed the specific area of the big winning opening 7. When it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area of the big winning opening 7 and the continuous winning switch 118 is turned on (YES in step S404), the CPU 102 performs the process of step S406. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter E is less than 16. In the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the number of times that the big winning opening 7 is opened, that is, whether or not the number of rounds in the big hit game has become 16 times. If YES in step S406, that is, if the value of the counter E is determined to be less than 16, the CPU 102 ends the jackpot process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined NO in the process of step S404 or the process of step S406, that is, when the continuous winning switch 118 is not turned on and the game ball does not pass the specific area of the big winning opening 7, or the counter E If it is determined that the value of 16 is greater than or equal to 16, the CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S407, sets the value of the counter E to 0, proceeds to the process of step S408, and sets the value of the big hit flag F1. Set to 0 to end the jackpot process.

  Returning to FIG. 18, when the process proceeds to step S410, the CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the big hit flag F1 is 0, that is, whether or not all of the predetermined big hit processes (step S391) are completed, and the big hit flag F1. If the value of the big hit flag is not 0 (NO in the process of step S410), that is, if the value of the big hit flag F1 is 1, it is determined that all the predetermined big hit processes have not been completed, and this special symbol game process (step S318) is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of big hit flag F1 is 0 (YES in step S410), the process proceeds to step S411, and CPU 102 has an odd number of big hit symbols as in the above-described step S359 (FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not it is a number symbol of the second-order, that is, whether or not it is a specific big win symbol. If YES in step S411, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is a specific bonus symbol, the process proceeds to step S412 and the CPU 102 executes a probability change process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the probability changing process (step S412). When the probability changing process is started, the CPU 102 first changes the contents of the hit determination counter C9 (random numbers 9, 0 to 30) updated in the random number update process in step S20 described above in the process in step S414. Normally, the random number 9 created in the process of step S20 has a lottery probability that a normal symbol is a win, but is 10/31. To rise. This is done by changing 0 to 27 to random numbers instead of 0 to 9 among the random numbers composed of 0 to 30 described above.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S416, and the CPU 102 shortens the normal symbol variation time t used in step S508 of the above normal symbol control process (FIG. 12). Normally, the normal symbol variation time t is 30 seconds, but the normal symbol variation time t is shortened to 2 seconds by executing the probability variation process. That is, the variable display is started in step S506 of the above normal symbol control process (step S504), and the normal symbol variation display time is 30 seconds until the winning symbol or the off symbol is fixedly displayed in step S510. Is reduced to 2 seconds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S418, and the CPU 102 extends the start winning opening opening time ST used in step S520 of the above starting winning opening opening process (FIG. 13). Normally, the start winning opening opening time ST is 0.2 seconds, but the start winning opening opening time ST is extended to 2 seconds when the probability changing process is executed. In other words, the opening time of the start winning port (electric tulip) 11 until the opening is closed in step S518 of the start winning port opening process (step S516) and closed in step S524 is 0.2 seconds. Extend to 2 seconds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S420, and the CPU 102 changes the contents of the jackpot determination counter C1 (random numbers 1, 0 to 314) updated in the random number update process in step S20 described above. Normally, the random number 1 created in the process of step S20 has a lottery probability that the special symbol combination is a big win, but it is 1/315. To 315. This is performed by changing 7, 33, 77, 111, and 222 to the big hit random numbers instead of the big hit random numbers consisting of 0 to 350 described above as the big hit random numbers.

  Next, proceeding to step S422, the CPU 102 shortens the special symbol variation time T used in step S369 of the special symbol control process (FIG. 22) described above. More specifically, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is shortened only when the reach is not reached (F1 = 0, F2 = 0). That is, in this embodiment, only the variation pattern 1 is shortened (see FIG. 23, step S363). Although the variation pattern 1 will be described later, the special symbol variation time T is normally set to 7 seconds (see FIG. 29), but is reduced to 2 seconds by executing the probability variation process. . In this way, the player can enjoy the change display of the special symbol that is a big hit and reach as usual while the probability change process is being executed, while the other, that is, the big win. For special symbols that are out of reach and reach, you can reduce the time required to display the boring variation display of special symbols that will be out of order by reducing the time required for the display to change. Impressing the player can give the player a sense of tension that the big hit is close. When the process of step S422 is completed, the CPU 102 ends the probability change process (step S412) and proceeds to the process of step S434.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S411, that is, if the jackpot symbol acquired this time is not the specific bonus symbol, the CPU 102 proceeds to the processing in step S434 and in the processing in step S306 described above (FIG. 16). The value of the counter B that has been incremented (added by 1) is decremented (subtracted by 1), the process proceeds to step S436, and the hold LED extinguishing control process is executed.

  As described above, if NO in step S411, that is, if the acquired jackpot symbol is not an odd jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol), the probability changing process in step S412 is not executed in the present embodiment. However, in this case, for example, the time-saving process having a lower profit for the player than the probability changing process may be performed. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is an even number jackpot symbol (usually a big bonus symbol) (NO in step S411), for example, a maximum of 100 special symbol game processes (step S318) are executed for a short time. As the process, a process that does not execute only the process of step S420 among the probability change processes may be set. Further, this may be adopted only when a big hit is made in the normal big symbol while the probability variation process is set. In this way, even if the normal bonus symbol is drawn, the time-saving process that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times, so that the player can win a big hit with the normal bonus symbol, for example. Even in such a case, it is possible to face the game without being overly discouraged, that is, it is possible to give the player an appropriate amount of joy, and as a result, the game performance is remarkably improved.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold LED extinguishing control process (step S436). When the hold LED extinguishing control process is executed, the CPU 102 first determines whether or not the value of the counter B is 1 or more in the process of step S438, and if the value of the counter B is not 1 or more (in step S438) NO), that is, when the value of the counter B is 0, the hold LED extinguishing control process (step S436) is finished, and the process proceeds to the process of step S50 of the main game process (FIG. 5). On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S438, that is, if the value of the counter B is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S440, and the CPU 102 selects one of the four hold LEDs 25a, 25b, 25c, and 25d The corresponding one is driven to turn off the lamp control circuit 37, and the hold LED turn-off control process is finished.

  Returning to FIG. 5, when the special game process (step S40) is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S50 and executes other processes. In addition, in the other processes of step S50, various processes other than the processes described above are executed. However, since these processes are not particularly related to the present invention, description thereof is omitted here. When the process of step S50 is completed, the CPU 102 proceeds to step S60 and executes a random number update process. This performs a loop process that continuously updates the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 (see FIG. 6) in the random number update process in step S20 described above until the next reset interrupt occurs.

  Specifically, the CPU 102 executes each process of step S20 to step S60 every reset interrupt (4 msec), but the time required to execute these processes is not the same every time. Accordingly, the time of 4 msec for generating the reset interrupt needs to be set with a margin, and the remaining time still occurs when the CPU 102 completes the process of step S50. In step S60, the remaining time is used to update the values of the random number counters C1 to C10. For example, the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 are incremented (add 1) until the remaining time is consumed. Alternatively, a process of continuing to decrement (1 subtraction) is executed, or a process of continuously updating the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 by a predetermined mathematical formula is executed.

  In addition, without updating the values of the random number counters C1 to C10, a specific random number counter, for example, a big hit determination counter C1, a big hit symbol determination counter C7, or a big hit determination counter C9, which greatly increases the player's profit. Only the affected random number counter may be updated, and the values of the random number counters C1 to C10 may not be updated every reset interrupt (4 msec). May be performed every time one cycle occurs. In this way, program design is facilitated and processing operations of the CPU 102 and the like can be reduced. In this way, by updating the predetermined random number counter using the remaining time of the reset interrupt that is repeatedly executed every 4 msec of the main game process, the increment of the value of the predetermined random number counter in one process is irregular. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for an unfair strategy using a player's sensory device or the like, for example, a player's strategy to hit a big hit random number or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, the ten types of variation patterns related to the special symbol will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a distribution diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the main control circuit 44. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation pattern 21, the fluctuation pattern 22, the fluctuation pattern 31, the fluctuation pattern 32, and the fluctuation pattern 4 as a collective fluctuation pattern. 30 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern 51 as a divided variation pattern, FIG. 31 is a front view of the special symbol display device 6 showing a selection screen in the variation pattern 51 and the variation pattern 52 as a divided variation pattern, and FIG. 32 is a divided variation pattern. FIG. 33 is a front view of the special symbol display device 6 showing a selection screen for the variation pattern 61 and the variation pattern 62 as a divided variation pattern, and FIG. 34 is an illustration of the variation pattern 61 as a divided variation pattern. FIG. 35 and FIG. 35 explain the variation pattern 62 as the division variation pattern. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the ten types of variation patterns in the main control circuit 44 are roughly divided into a collective variation pattern and a divided variation pattern. The collective variation pattern is displayed on the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51 described above. On the other hand, the divided variation pattern is a variation pattern whose content is changed by the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51, and is step S349 of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 19). In this process, when a symbol that does not reach is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 this time, it does not appear. That is, the divided variation pattern is not displayed this time. Appears at a predetermined probability only when a reach or jackpot symbol is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 6. It has become. First, the collective variation pattern will be described.

  There are six types of collective variation patterns: variation pattern 1, variation pattern 21, variation pattern 22, variation pattern 31, variation pattern 32, and variation pattern 4. First, variation pattern 1 is processed in step S349 (FIG. 19). This time is a collective variation pattern that is selected when a symbol that does not reach is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6, and as shown in FIG. 28, the random number acquisition process in step S308 (FIG. 16). The acquisition value of the jackpot determination counter C1 (random number 1, 0 to 314) acquired in step 0 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, but 0 when the probability change process is set in step S412) ~ 6, 8 ~ 32, 34 ~ 76, 78 ~ 110, 112 ~ 221, 223 ~ 314 and probability 62/63), reach determination cow Data C5 (random number 5, 0 to 11) is 0 to 2, 4 to 11 (probability 11/12), the big hit flag F1 = 0 and the reach flag F2 in the processing of FIG. 23 (step S358 and step S362) Only when = 0, the variation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern 1 is transmitted from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111 as described above in the process of step S363 (FIG. 23). As a result, the special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed. Therefore, when the variation pattern 1 is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it always becomes a missed symbol that is not reachable.

  The contents of the fluctuation pattern 1 are as shown in FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, the number of seconds after the fluctuation pattern represents the special symbol fluctuation time T, and is “high speed”, “medium speed”, “low speed”, “super high speed”. “Ultra-low speed” indicates the fluctuation speed when the special symbol is scrolled, and “Shake” means that the special symbol is not completely stopped as described above, and is slightly moving up and down a few frames. The total rotation means that all the special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) displayed on the left symbol display unit 8, the middle symbol display unit 9, and the right symbol display unit 10 are synchronized. The ghost is a type of character displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6.

  In the same manner, the variation pattern 21 is a symbol other than a plus or minus one symbol that is not plus or minus one symbol as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S351 or step S352 (FIG. 19). Is a collective variation pattern selected when the out-of-reach symbol is determined, and the acquired value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, provided that the probability variation process is set to 0 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62/63), the obtained numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), for reach design mode determination The obtained numerical value of the counter C6 (random number 6, 0 to 62) is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), and the variation pattern determination counter C8 (random number 8, 0) 51) when the obtained numerical value is 0 to 24 (probability 25/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1 and the reach mode flag F3 = 1 (the processing of step S364), or the big hit determination counter C1 The obtained numerical value is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, but when the probability variation processing is set, 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62 / 63), the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), the acquisition numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 is 20 to 63 (probability 43/63), and the acquisition of the variation pattern determination counter C8 When the numerical value is 0 to 29 (probability 30/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1, and the reach mode flag F3 = 0, step S365 or step Process 366 are variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6 at (Figure 23). The contents of the variation pattern 21 are as shown in FIG.

  The variation pattern 22 is a collective variation pattern that is selected when a big hit symbol is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353 (FIG. 19), and is a big hit determination counter. The acquired value of C1 is 7 (probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), an odd jackpot symbol in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (specific big bonus symbol) Is stored (probability 1/2), the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 1 to 5 (probability 5/52), the big hit flag F1 = 1, or the big numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 ( Probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), even the big hit symbol storage buffer (usually big hit symbol) In the case of storage (probability 1/2), the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 0 to 5 (probability 6/52), and the big hit flag F1 = 1, in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23) The special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed. The contents of the variation pattern 22 are as shown in FIG.

  Similar to the variation pattern 21, the variation pattern 31 is a reach symbol other than a plus or minus one symbol as a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 at this time in the process of step S 351 or step S 352. It is a collective variation pattern selected when the off symbol is determined, and the obtained numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, provided that the probability variation process is set to 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62/63), the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), and the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 The obtained numerical value is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), and the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 25 to 31 (probability 7). 52), when the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1 and the reach mode flag F3 = 1, or the obtained numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, where When setting the probability variation process, 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314 and the probability 62/63), and the acquisition value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12) ), The acquired numerical value of the reach symbol mode determination counter C6 is 20 to 63 (probability 43/63), the acquired numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 30 to 51 (probability 30/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach When the flag F2 = 1 and the reach mode flag F3 = 0, the special symbol display device 6 displays the variation in the process of step S365 or step S366 (FIG. 23).The contents of the variation pattern 31 are as shown in FIG.

  The variation pattern 32 is a collective variation pattern that is selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353, and is obtained by the big hit determination counter C1. Is 7 (probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and an odd jackpot symbol (specific big bonus symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), when the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 6 to 10 (probability 5/52), and when the big hit flag F1 = 1, or the big numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 (probability 1/315) However, when the probability variation process is set, the probability is 1/63 with 7, 33, 77, 111, 222), and an even number of big hit symbols (normally big hit symbols) are stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer ( Rate 1/2), the obtained value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 6 to 10 (probability 5/52), and the big hit flag F1 = 1, the special symbol is obtained in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23). The display device 6 displays the variation. The contents of the variation pattern 32 are as shown in FIG.

  The variation pattern 4 is a collective variation pattern that is selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353, and is obtained by the big hit determination counter C1. Is 7 (probability 1/315, but when probability variation processing is set, it becomes 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and an odd jackpot symbol (specific big bonus symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), only when the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 0 (probability 1/52) and the big hit flag F1 = 1, the special symbol display device 6 varies in the process of step S360 (FIG. 23). Is displayed. Accordingly, when the variation pattern 4 is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it always becomes an odd jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol). The contents of the variation pattern 22 are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the division variation pattern will be described in detail. There are four types of divided variation patterns: variation pattern 51, variation pattern 52, variation pattern 61, and variation pattern 62. First, variation pattern 51 is displayed on special symbol display device 6 this time through the processing of step S352 (FIG. 19). A split variation pattern that is selected when a symbol with a plus or minus one symbol is determined as a symbol to be stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. The acquired numerical value of the counter C1 for determination is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, but 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to when probability variation processing is set. 314, the probability 62/63), the acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12), and the reach symbol pattern determination counter C6 The obtained value is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), the obtained value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 32 to 41 (probability 10/52), the big hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1, and the reach mode flag F3 = 1 (the processing of step S358, step S362 and step S364 in FIG. 23), the main control circuit 44 corresponds to the display control circuit 111 as described above in the processing of step S366 (FIG. 23). When the change pattern designation command (FIG. 24) is transmitted, the special symbol display device 6 displays the change pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the content of the variation pattern 51 is composed of a variation pattern introductory part, a selection screen, and a variation pattern main part, and the variation time of the entire variation pattern 51 is 35 seconds. The variation time at the beginning of the variation pattern is 10 seconds. During this time, the special symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) that are variably displayed on the symbol display units 8, 9, 10 of the special symbol display device 6 are symbols. 30. In the divided variation pattern in this embodiment, the reach is always reached at the beginning of the variation pattern. Here, the left symbol (special symbol of the left symbol display unit 8) and the right symbol (right symbol display). The special symbol of the part 10 is the same.

  Then, when the variation time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 11, 12, and 13) are displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6, as shown in FIG. Similarly, a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 21 and 22), as well as a chemical image (hereinafter also simply referred to as an image) having a motif of “forest” formed by the collected variation pattern main portion group 1 as a motif. And 23) are displayed in a substantially two-divided image with a morphological image of the “sea” as a motif of the variation pattern main part group 2, and in the lower part of the display unit 30, “Proceed to the forest” "Do you want to go to the sea? Please select either" message image 60 is displayed for 5 seconds (Hereafter, the display screen including the message image as shown in FIG. 31 is also considered as the selection screen. That is, Sage image is also a sense considered as part of the selection screen. Of course selection screen, may be without this message image). Further, instead of the message image 60, a voice message may be used. Of course, both the message image 60 and a voice message may be present. Hereinafter, a plurality of chemical images displayed on the selection screen (images such as “forest” and “sea”) are also referred to as a variation pattern main part group 70.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the selection screen is displayed, the special symbol variation display that is in the reach state becomes translucent and overlaps as if it is located on the rear surface of the selection screen. Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to concentrate on the selection screen compared to the case where the corner of the selection screen is exclusively used to display the variation of the special symbol, and also the variation of the special symbol while concentrating on the selection screen. There is an effect that it is easy to check the state. This is an effect that can be achieved by utilizing the ability to distinguish the perspective of vision that changes depending on the viewpoint of human interest.

  Thus, when the selection screen by the variation pattern main part group 70 is displayed, the player's correspondence is as follows. That is, by operating the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51, the position of the pointer 52 is determined to move within 5 seconds, that is, within the effective time of the determination button 51, and either the “forest” image or the “sea” image is determined. The case where the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is selected and the case where 5 seconds elapse without selecting any fluctuation pattern main part group 70 without operating the cross switch 50 or the determination button 51.

  First, a case where an image of one of the fluctuation pattern main part groups 70 is selected when the former selection screen is displayed will be described. When the selection screen is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6, the player operates the cross switch 50 to move the arrow pointer 52 on the display unit 30 to a desired position. For example, when the player wants to select “sea”, the pointer 52 is moved to an area where “sea” is displayed on the display unit 30. Then, when the pointer 52 is moved to a region where “sea” is displayed on the display unit 30, the determination button 51 is pressed to determine that “sea” has been selected. That is, when the player selects a desired variation pattern main part group 70 when the selection screen for the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is displayed, the arrow-shaped pointer 52 on the display unit 30 is desired by the cross switch 50. It is only necessary to press the determination button 51 after moving to the position.

The cross switch 50 is configured in a cross shape as shown in FIG. 1, and the pointer 52 is moved up, down, left, and right by pressing an end of the cross switch 50 configured in the cross shape. Yes. For example, the pointer 52 continues to move rightward on the display unit 30 by continuously pressing the right end of the cross switch 50, and the pointer 52 stops on the display unit 30 by releasing the press.

  When the player selects “Hayashi” (variation pattern main part group 1) as the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 from the selection screen of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 The image with the motif “Hayashi” is displayed as the scene, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed while maintaining the “swing” state, and the first control is performed by random number processing performed on the display control circuit 111 side described later. 100% of the first effect character determined by the effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0 to 99) appears, and the second effect character determined by the second effect character determination counter C12 (random numbers 12, 0 to 99). The effect character appears with a predetermined probability by the second effect character appearance counter C13 (random numbers 13, 0 to 99), and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random numbers 14, 0 to 0). 99), one variation pattern main portion is selected from the three types of variation pattern main portions, that is, the variation pattern main portions 11, 12, and 13. The selected variation pattern main portion is selected by the special symbol display device 6. The symbols are displayed on the symbol display portions 8, 9, and 10 in a variable manner. In addition, the middle symbols that the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13 are variably displayed are as shown in FIG. 30. In FIG. 30, "reverse rotation medium speed" and "reverse rotation low speed" mean that the middle symbols are normal. This represents the fluctuation speed when scrolling display in the reverse direction, and the rest is the same as in FIG.

  That is, the selection screen by the variation pattern main part group 70 is displayed, and when the player decides to move the position of the pointer 52 by operating the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51 within the valid time of the decision button 51, that is, immediately after that, that is, The selected variation pattern main part is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6 immediately after the determination button 51 is pressed. Therefore, when the enter button 51 is operated in this way, the player can wait for 5 seconds of the valid time of the enter button 51 (in other words, 5 seconds of the maximum display time of the selection screen) without waiting for the special symbol. As a result, the game can be enjoyed without stress.

  Here, when the player operates the decision button 51 on the selection screen, the special symbol display device 6 immediately displays the initial variation as the variation display of the variation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13 immediately thereafter, and then the main variation. Is displayed. As will be described later in detail, the display time of the initial fluctuation is 5 seconds at the maximum. This is the time taken from the effective time of the decision button 51 to 5 seconds until the player actually presses the decision button 51. It is time to subtract. The display time of the main variation is 20 seconds regardless of the operation of the enter button 51. That is, the display time of the selection screen in the variation pattern 51 is equivalent to the time until the player operates the determination button 51 and is 5 seconds at the maximum, and the variation pattern main portion (variation pattern main portions 11, 12, 13). ) Is a time obtained by adding the display time of the initial fluctuation and the main fluctuation to 20 to 25 seconds.

  Furthermore, the variation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13 are set with the degree of the effect (reliability that becomes a big hit). In this case, the effect effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is the lowest, and the fluctuation pattern main part The effect effect of 12 is the next lowest, and the effect effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 13 is the highest. The process of selecting one fluctuation pattern main part from the above-described fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13 will be described in detail later, based on the time until the player presses the enter button 51. In this case, if the time until the decision button 51 is pressed is short, there is a high probability that the variation pattern main part 13 having a high effect is selected, and the time until the decision button 51 is pressed. If the length is long, the probability that the variation pattern main part 11 having a low production effect is selected is high.

  Similarly, the degree of the stage effect (reliability to be a big hit) is set for each of the second stage characters, and the time until the decision button 51 is pressed for selection of the second stage character having a different stage effect. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short, the second effect character having a high effect is likely to be selected. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is long, the effect is low. The probability that the second performance character is selected is high. Further, whether or not the second effect character appears is executed based on the time until the determination button 51 is pressed. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short, the probability that the second effect character appears is high. If the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is long, the probability that the second effect character appears is low.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 30, when the player selects “Sea” (variation pattern main part group 2) as the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 from the selection screen of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, the special symbol display device 6 On the display unit 30, an image having “sea” as a motif is displayed as a scene, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed in a “swing” state. Similarly to the variation pattern main part group 1 described above, one fluctuation pattern main part is selected from the fluctuation pattern main parts 21, 22, and 23, and the selected fluctuation pattern main part is displayed on the special symbol display device 6. The symbols are displayed on the symbol display portions 8, 9, and 10 in a variable manner. The first and second effect characters are also the same as the variation pattern main part group 1 described above, and the effect of the change pattern main parts 21, 22, and 23, the initial variation and the main variation display time, and the variation The middle symbols to be displayed are as shown in FIG. 30 and are processed in accordance with the variation pattern main part group 1. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the latter case where neither variation pattern main part group 70 is selected when the selection screen is displayed will be described. In a case other than when the player presses the decision button 51 after the selection screen is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 until 5 seconds elapse after the cross switch 50 is operated, that is, the selection If the operation of the cross switch 50 and the enter button 51 is not finished within 5 seconds after the screen is displayed, it is considered that the player has not selected any variation pattern main group 70. become. In this case, the variation pattern main part group 70 is automatically determined based on the position of the pointer 52 when the selection screen ends, that is, when five seconds have elapsed after the selection screen is displayed. ing. That is, when the position of the pointer 52 when five seconds have elapsed after the selection screen is displayed points to the “forest” area on the display unit 30 as shown in FIG. It is assumed that “forest” has been selected as the group 70, while not shown, but when the “sea” region is indicated on the display unit 30, “sea” is selected as the variation pattern main group 70. It is supposed to be done.

  That is, in FIG. 30, when it is considered that the player has selected “Hayashi” (variation pattern main part group 1) as the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 from the selection screen of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, In the display unit 30 of FIG. 6, an image having “forest” as a scene is displayed as a scene. The image with the motif of “sea” is displayed as a scene, and the left and right symbols are displayed in a “swing” state.

  When it is considered that the variation pattern main part group 70 has been selected, the process shifts to the fluctuation pattern main part, and from among the plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts, regardless of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 described later. The variation pattern main portion having the lowest effect is selected, and the selected variation pattern main portion (variation pattern main portion 11 or 21) is, as described above, each symbol display portion 8 of the special symbol display device 6, 9 and 10 are displayed in a variable manner. In this case, as will be described in detail later, although the first effect character determined by the first effect character determination counter C11 appears 100%, the second effect character determination counter C12 and the second effect character appear. Regardless of the counter C13, the second performance character does not appear forcibly.

  Therefore, in this case, the display time of the selection screen is a maximum of 5 seconds (in other words, when the effective time of the decision button 51 has elapsed 5 seconds), and when the 5 seconds have elapsed, the special symbol display device 6 has an initial variation of Only the main fluctuation is displayed without being displayed. That is, in this case, the display time of the selection screen in the fluctuation pattern 51 is 5 seconds, and the display time of the fluctuation pattern main part (fluctuation pattern main part 11 or 21) is the same as the main fluctuation display time, which is 20 seconds. In addition, when the enter button 51 is not operated in this way, the effect of rendering is lowest in the subsequent variable display.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 52 will be described. The variation pattern 52 is a divided variation pattern that is selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353 (FIG. 19), and is shown in FIG. As described above, the acquisition value of the jackpot determination counter C1 acquired in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in step S308 is 7 (probability 1/315, but when the probability variation process is set, 7, 33, 77, 111, 222) (Probability 1/63), odd jackpot symbol (specific big hit symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), and the obtained numerical value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 11 to 35 (probability 25/52), When the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the processing of step S358 in FIG. 23), or the acquired numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 (probability 1/315, however, the probability variation processing) When set, it is 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and even the big hit symbol storage buffer (usually big hit symbol) is stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2). When the obtained numerical value is 11 to 26 (probability 16/52) and the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the process of step S358 in FIG. 23), the main control is performed as described above in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23). When the variation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern 52 is transmitted from the circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, the special symbol display device 6 displays the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 52 are substantially the same as the contents of the fluctuation pattern 51 described above, and therefore, differences from the fluctuation pattern 51 will be described here. The content of the variation pattern 52 is different from the variation pattern 51 in that the variation time of the entire variation pattern 52 is 37 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern main part is 22 to 27 seconds, and the variation pattern. The main part group 70 is different in content.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 in the fluctuation pattern 52 are composed of a fluctuation pattern main part group 3 and a fluctuation pattern main part group 4. First, the fluctuation pattern main part group 3 is a fluctuation pattern. It consists of main parts 31, 32, 33, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 31, 32, 33 is 22 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main part 31 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main part 32 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main part 33 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 1, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 4 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 41, 42, and 43. The main fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern main parts 41, 42, and 43 are 22 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main part 41 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main part 42 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main part 43 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 2, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 61 will be described. The variation pattern 61 is a divided variation pattern that is selected when the reach deviation symbol of plus or minus one symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S352 (FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 28, the acquired numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 acquired in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in step S308 is 0 to 6, 8 to 314 (probability 314/315, however, the probability variation process setting) The time is 0 to 6, 8 to 32, 34 to 76, 78 to 110, 112 to 221, 223 to 314, and the probability 62/63). The acquisition numerical value of the reach determination counter C5 is 3 (probability 1/12). The acquired numerical value of the symbol mode determining counter C6 is 0 to 19 (probability 20/63), the acquired numerical value of the variation pattern determining counter C8 is 42 to 51 (probability 10/52), When the hit flag F1 = 0, the reach flag F2 = 1, and the reach mode flag F3 = 1 (the processes in steps S358, S362, and S364 in FIG. 23), the process in step S366 (FIG. 23) is as described above. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 61 is transmitted from the main control circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, the special symbol display device 6 displays the fluctuation pattern.

  The contents of the variation pattern 61 are substantially the same as the contents of the variation pattern 51 described above, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, and therefore, differences from the variation pattern 51 will be described here. The content of the variation pattern 61 is different from the variation pattern 51 in that the variation time of the entire variation pattern 61 is 40 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern main part is 25 to 30 seconds, and the selection screen And the contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 are different.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the selection screen for the variation pattern 61 is a variation pattern main portion in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 51, 52 and 53) are gathered on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. In the same way, an image with the motif of “soccer” that Group 5 has formed, and a variation pattern main group 6 in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 61, 62, and 63) are gathered are embodied. Similarly, an image with “Kendo” as a motif, which is an image of a variation pattern main portion group 7 in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions (variation pattern main portions 71, 72 and 73) are gathered. In the middle of the left and right, the message is displayed in three parts, and at the bottom of the display section 30 is a message “Do you want to go to football? Do you want to go to baseball? Image 60 And it is displayed for 5 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 in the fluctuation pattern 61 are composed of a fluctuation pattern main part group 5, a fluctuation pattern main part group 6, and a fluctuation pattern main part group 7. The group 5 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 51, 52, and 53, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 51, 52, and 53 is 25 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 51 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 52 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main portion 53 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 or 2 and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 6 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 61, 62, 63, and the main fluctuations of the fluctuation pattern main parts 61, 62, 63 are 25 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 61 is the lowest, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 62 is the next lowest, and the effect of the variation pattern main portion 63 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 or 2 and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 7 is constituted by fluctuation pattern main parts 71 and 72 (that is, the fluctuation pattern main part group 7 is constituted by two kinds of fluctuation pattern main parts), and each fluctuation pattern main part. The main fluctuations of 71 and 72 are 25 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main portion 71 is low, and the effect of the variation pattern main portion 72 is high. The contents other than these are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 or 2 and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 62 will be described. The variation pattern 62 is a divided variation pattern selected when the big hit symbol is determined as the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 6 this time in the process of step S353 (FIG. 19), and is shown in FIG. As described above, the acquisition value of the jackpot determination counter C1 acquired in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in step S308 is 7 (probability 1/315, but when the probability variation process is set, 7, 33, 77, 111, 222) (Probability 1/63), odd jackpot symbol (specific big hit symbol) is stored in the jackpot symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2), and the obtained value of the variation pattern determination counter C8 is 36 to 51 (probability 16/52), When the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the processing of step S358 in FIG. 23), or the acquired numerical value of the big hit determination counter C1 is 7 (probability 1/315, however, the probability variation processing) When set, it is 7, 33, 77, 111, 222 and the probability is 1/63), and even the big hit symbol storage buffer (usually big hit symbol) is stored in the big hit symbol storage buffer (probability 1/2). When the obtained numerical value is 27 to 51 (probability 25/52) and the big hit flag F1 = 1 (the process of step S358 in FIG. 23), the main control is performed as described above in the process of step S360 or step S361 (FIG. 23). When the variation pattern designation command (FIG. 24) corresponding to the variation pattern 62 is transmitted from the circuit 44 to the display control circuit 111, the variation is displayed on the special symbol display device 6.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the content of the variation pattern 62 is substantially the same as the content of the variation pattern 61 described above, and therefore, differences from the variation pattern 61 will be described here. The variation pattern 62 differs from the variation pattern 61 in that the variation time of the entire variation pattern 62 is 42 seconds, the variation time of the variation pattern main part is 27 to 32 seconds, and the variation pattern. The main part group 70 is different in content.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 in the fluctuation pattern 62 are composed of a fluctuation pattern main part group 8, a fluctuation pattern main part group 9, and a fluctuation pattern main part group 10. The group 8 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 81, 82, 83, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 81, 82, 83 is 27 seconds. Further, the effect of the variation pattern main part 81 is the lowest, the effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 82 is the next lowest, and the effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 83 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 5, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 9 is composed of fluctuation pattern main parts 91, 92, 93, and the main fluctuation of each fluctuation pattern main part 91, 92, 93 is 27 seconds. Furthermore, the production effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 91 is the lowest, the production effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 92 is the next lowest, and the production effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 93 is the highest. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 6, and are as shown in FIG.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern main part group 10 is constituted by fluctuation pattern main parts 101 and 102 (that is, the fluctuation pattern main part group 10 is constituted by two kinds of fluctuation pattern main parts), and each fluctuation pattern main part. The main fluctuation of 101 and 102 is 27 seconds. Furthermore, the effect of the variation pattern main part 101 is low, and the effect of the fluctuation pattern main part 102 is high. The contents other than these are the same as those of the variation pattern main part group 7, and are as shown in FIG.

  Here, in the case where the divided variation pattern is displayed on the special symbol display device 6, when the player selects the desired variation pattern main part group 70 when the selection screen is displayed on the display unit 30, the display is performed. Processing executed by the control circuit 111 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a display main control process (main routine) executed by the CPU 140 of the display control circuit 111. Immediately after the power is turned on, the CPU 140 initializes each flag, each register, each storage area and the like necessary for stack setting and the following processing as initialization processing (step S701). When completing the initialization process in step S701, the CPU 140 proceeds to the random number update process in step S703. The CPU 140 executes a main routine (each program stored in the ROM 142 of the display control circuit 111), that is, each process of steps S703 to S760 described below, every reset interrupt (4 msec).

  FIG. 37 is a list of random numbers handled in the display control circuit 111. As shown in FIG. 37, various counters C11 to C14 (random numbers 11 to 14) are set in the main control circuit 44 as random numbers for setting the display mode at random. CPU140 updates the value regarding each counter C11-C14 by the random number update process of step S703. The first effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0 to 99) displays the first effect character to appear on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 when displaying the variation pattern main part in the divided variation pattern. This is a random number counter for determination, which starts from 0 when the power is turned on and is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C11 becomes 100, it is rewritten to 0.

  The second effect character determination counter C12 (random numbers 12, 0 to 99) displays the second effect character that appears on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 when displaying the variation pattern main part in the divided variation pattern. A random number counter for determination, which starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) each time the first effect character determination counter C11 is set to 0. However, when this random number counter C12 becomes 100, it is rewritten to 0.

  The second effect character appearance counter C13 (random numbers 13, 0 to 99) causes the second effect character to appear on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 when displaying the variation pattern main part in the divided variation pattern. This is a random number counter for determining whether or not it starts from 0 when the power is turned on, and is incremented (added by 1) each time the second effect character determination counter C12 is set to 0. However, when this random number counter C13 becomes 100, it is rewritten to 0.

  The fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random numbers 14, 0 to 999) is a random number counter for determining the fluctuation pattern main part to be displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 in the divided fluctuation pattern. Starting from 0 when the power is turned on, it is incremented (added by 1) every reset interrupt (4 msec). However, when this random number counter C14 becomes 1000, it is rewritten to 0.

  Returning to FIG. 36, when the CPU 140 finishes the random number update process of step S703, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S705, where steps S360, S361, S363, and the special symbol variation display process (FIG. 23) described above are performed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been input from the main control circuit 44 by the processing of step S365 or step S366. If NO in step S705, that is, if a variation pattern designation command is not input from the main control circuit 44, the process proceeds to step S750. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S705, that is, if a change pattern designation command is input from the main control circuit 44, the process proceeds to step S707, and the CPU 140 executes a change pattern display process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern display process (step S707). When the variation pattern display process is executed, the CPU 140 first determines in step S709 whether or not the variation pattern designation command input this time is a command corresponding to the divided variation pattern. In step S709, NO, that is, the fluctuation pattern designation command inputted this time does not correspond to the divided fluctuation pattern, that is, the fluctuation pattern designation command inputted this time is a command corresponding to the collective fluctuation pattern. In this case, the process proceeds to step S710, and the CPU 140 specially selects one of the collective variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command input this time, that is, any one of the variation patterns 1, 4, 21, 22, 31, or 32. The symbol display device 6 displays the variation, and the process proceeds to step S737.

  On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S709, that is, if the fluctuation pattern designation command input this time is a command corresponding to the divided fluctuation pattern, the process proceeds to step S711, and the CPU 140 described above. Among the counters C11 to C14, the current value of the counter C11 is acquired and stored in the acquired numerical value storage area of the RAM 141. That is, at the timing when the display control circuit 111 receives the variation pattern designation command as a command corresponding to the divided variation pattern from the main control circuit 44, the first effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0 to 99). Is obtained, and the first effect character that appears when the variation pattern main part of the divided variation pattern described above is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6 is determined. Thereby, the uniformity and irregularity of the numerical value acquired by the counter C11 for determining the first effect character are ensured, and accordingly, the first effect character appearing when the variation pattern main part is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6. The uniformity and irregularity of the contents are ensured, and the gaming property of the gaming machine 1 is improved. The contents of the first effect character will be described in detail later.

  When the random number acquisition process in step S711 ends, the CPU 140 proceeds to step S713 and executes the process of displaying the variation pattern introductory part. In the process of displaying the fluctuation pattern introductory part in step S713, the beginning of the above-described divided fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command input this time, that is, one of the beginnings of the fluctuation patterns 51, 52, 61 or 62 is displayed. A process of variably displaying on the special symbol display device 6 is executed. When the process of step S713 is finished, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S715.

  When the process proceeds to step S715, the CPU 140 determines whether or not the variation pattern beginning displayed in step S713 has ended, that is, whether or not the variation time (10 seconds) of the variation pattern beginning has elapsed. To do. If NO in step S715, that is, if the fluctuation time (10 seconds) has not elapsed and the fluctuation display at the beginning of the fluctuation pattern has not ended, the CPU 140 ends the fluctuation pattern display process and displays the main display. Returning to the control process (FIG. 36), the process proceeds to step S750. On the other hand, if YES in the process of step S715, that is, if the fluctuation time (10 seconds) has elapsed and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern intro has ended, the process proceeds to step S717, and the CPU 140 displays the selection screen. Execute the process. In the selection screen display process in step S717, the above-described divided variation pattern selection screen corresponding to the variation pattern designation command input this time, that is, the variation pattern 51, 52, 61 or 62 selection screen (FIG. 31 or FIG. 33). ) Is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. When the process of step S717 is completed, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S719.

  When the process proceeds to step S719, the CPU 140 determines whether or not there is an input from the cross switch 50 as an operation unit, and YES in the process of step S719, that is, when there is an input from the cross switch 50. In step S721, the CPU 140 moves and displays the pointer 52 on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 based on the input, and then proceeds to step S723. On the other hand, if NO in the process of step S719, that is, if there is no input from the cross switch 50, the CPU 140 proceeds directly to the process of step S723.

  When the process proceeds to step S723, the CPU 140 determines whether or not there is an input from the determination button 51 as an operation unit, and YES in the process of step S723, that is, when there is an input from the determination button 51. That is, when one of the plurality of variation pattern main part groups 70 displayed on the divided variation pattern selection screen is selected, the process proceeds to step S725, and the CPU 140 performs the variation pattern main part selection process. Execute.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern main part selection process (step S725). When the variation pattern main part selection process is executed, the CPU 140 first acquires the current values of the counters C12, C13, and C14 out of the counters C11 to C14 described above in step S727, and acquires the RAM 141. Each is stored in the numerical storage area.

  Here, the values of the counters C12, C13, and C14 indicate the timing at which the display control circuit 111 receives an input from the determination button 51 as the operation means, in other words, the player presses the determination button 51 as the operation means. It is acquired on the basis of the operation timing and the time from when the selection screen is displayed until the player presses the enter button 51 as the operation means. When the part is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it is determined whether or not the second effect character and the second effect character appear, and the plural set in the selected variation pattern main part group 70 One fluctuation pattern main part is determined from among the fluctuation pattern main parts. As a result, the uniformity and irregularity of the obtained numerical values of the second effect character determination counter C12, the second effect character appearance counter C13, and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 are ensured. Uniformity and irregularity of the contents and appearance ratio of the second effect character appearing when the special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed and the contents of the variation pattern main part are guaranteed, and the gaming property of the gaming machine 1 is remarkably increased. Will improve. The contents of the second effect character will be described in detail later.

  When the random number acquisition process in step S727 ends, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process in step S731, and the first effect character, the second effect character, and the change corresponding to the input value of the determination button 51 and the values of the counters C11 to C14. A process of displaying a predetermined display of the pattern main part on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 for a predetermined time is executed. That is, the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 (the above-described fluctuation pattern main part groups 1 to 10, FIG. 30, FIG. 32, FIG. 34, FIG. 35) is determined by the input value of the determination button 51 (value indicating the position of the pointer 52). When the second effect character appears based on the value of the second effect character appearance counter C13, the second effect character determined based on the value of the second effect character determination counter C12 is displayed, and the variation pattern main The variation pattern main part determined by the value of the part determination counter C14 is displayed, and the first effect character determined by the value of the first effect character determination counter C11 is displayed.

  Here, in the process of this step S731, when the player presses the enter button 51, the main part of the variation pattern selected immediately after that, without waiting for 5 seconds of the valid time of the enter button 51 to pass, The special symbol display device 6 is variably displayed. As described above, the display time of the main part of the fluctuation pattern is 20 to 25 seconds (FIG. 30) in the fluctuation pattern 51, 22 to 27 seconds (FIG. 32) in the fluctuation pattern 52, and 25 to 30 seconds in the fluctuation pattern 61. (FIG. 34) and the fluctuation pattern 62 are 27 to 32 seconds (FIG. 35). This is due to the fact that the display time of the selection screen is a maximum of 5 seconds, that is, the time from when the player displays the selection screen until the decision button 51 is operated. In addition, the relationship between each divided variation pattern 51, 52, 61, 62 and each counter C11-C14 will be described in detail later. When the process of step S731 is completed, the CPU 140 returns to the variation pattern display process (FIG. 38) and proceeds to the process of step S737.

  On the other hand, if NO in step S723, that is, if there is no input from the enter button 51, that is, one variation pattern main group is still selected from the plurality of variation pattern main part groups 70 displayed on the divided variation pattern selection screen. If the group 70 has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S733, and the CPU 140 determines whether or not 5 seconds as the valid time of the decision button 51 on the selection screen has elapsed, and in step S733. If NO in the process, i.e., 5 seconds have not elapsed and the valid time of the decision button 51 on the selection screen is still available, the variation pattern main part selection process is terminated and the process returns to the display main control process (FIG. 36). The process proceeds to S750. On the other hand, if YES in the processing of step S733, that is, if 5 seconds have elapsed and there is no valid time for the enter button 51 on the selection screen, that is, during the valid time for the enter button 51 on the selection screen, If the determination button 51 is not pressed, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S735.

  When the process proceeds to step S735, the CPU 140 executes the following process. That is, if the player never presses the enter button 51 during the valid time of the enter button 51 on the selection screen, the current value of the pointer 52 is displayed on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6. Thus, the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is automatically determined, and the fluctuation pattern main having the lowest effect is forcibly selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts set in the determined fluctuation pattern main part group 70. Regardless of the value of the second effect character appearance counter C13, the appearance rate of the second effect character is forcibly set to 0%, and the second effect character is not displayed. Processing for displaying the first effect character determined by the value of the effect character determination counter C11 is executed. Then, when the process of step S735 is finished, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S737.

  When the process proceeds to step S737, the CPU 140 performs the all symbol stop designation command by the process of step S360, step S361, step S363, step S365 or step S366 of the special symbol variation display process (FIG. 23) described here. It is determined whether or not an input has been made from the control circuit 44. If NO in step S737, that is, if no all symbol stop designation command is input from the main control circuit 44, the CPU 140 ends the variation pattern display process (step S707). On the other hand, if YES in step S737, that is, if an all symbol stop designation command is input from the main control circuit 44, the process proceeds to step S739, and the CPU 140 displays a special symbol display in step S731 or step S735. A special symbol of a predetermined divided variation pattern (variation pattern main part) that is variably displayed on the device 6, that is, the left, middle, and right symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display portions 8, 9, and 10 are stopped and confirmed. Execute the process. Then, when the process of step S739 is completed, the CPU 140 ends the variation pattern display process (step S707).

  That is, in this variation pattern display process (step S707), as shown in FIG. 40A, when any of the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62 starts to vary in the special symbol display device 6, First, the fluctuation pattern beginning is displayed for 10 seconds, and the reach state is displayed on the display unit 30. When 10 seconds have elapsed and the selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 or 33, the player operates the cross switch 50 to the desired variation pattern main group 70 by operating the cross switch 50. The change pattern main part group 70 is determined by moving and pressing the determination button 51. However, the maximum display time of the selection screen is 5 seconds. Therefore, the player must end the operation of the decision button 51 within 5 seconds after the selection screen is displayed. That is, the valid time of the enter button 51 is 5 seconds.

  Then, if the enter button 51 is operated within 5 seconds, the special symbol display device 6 immediately changes to the selection screen so that the selected fluctuation pattern main part starts to fluctuate. The change will be displayed and then the main change will be displayed. Here, the initial variation display time is a maximum of 5 seconds, that is, the initial variation display time is obtained by subtracting the time required for the player to actually press the decision button 51 from the decision button 51 effective time of 5 seconds. It will be time. That is, the display time of the initial fluctuation is an unspecified time. Accordingly, the display time of the selection screen is a time obtained by subtracting the display time of the initial variation from 5 seconds of the valid time of the decision button 51, and the display time of the selection screen is also an unspecified time. On the other hand, the display time of the main variation is a specific time, which is 20 seconds for the variation pattern 51, 22 seconds for the variation pattern 52, 25 seconds for the variation pattern 61, and 27 seconds for the variation pattern 62. This is a time obtained by adding the display time of the initial fluctuation and the main fluctuation. Further, the second effect character selected based on the operation of the determination button 51 appears at a predetermined rate and is displayed in parallel with the display of the variation pattern main part. FIG. 40A is a timing chart from the start of change to the stop of the division change pattern.

  As described above, the extraction of the variation pattern main part and the second effect character and the appearance rate of the second effect character are determined based on the timing when the player operates the determination button 51 and the time until the operation. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), a variation pattern main part determination counter C14 is selected from a plurality of variation pattern main parts having different effects, which are set in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70. When one variation pattern main part is extracted based on the obtained numerical value, if the operation time of the player's decision button 51 is within one second after the selection screen is displayed, the variation pattern main part having the highest effect is produced. The probability of extraction is high, and the fluctuation pattern main part with high production effect is extracted in the order of operation time exceeding 1 second within 3 seconds and exceeding 3 seconds within 5 seconds. It has become to so that. If the player does not operate the determination button 51 during the display of the selection screen for 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern main part having the lowest effect is extracted 100%. For example, when this is applied to the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 (see FIG. 30), the probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 13 is extracted is high when the operation time is within 1 second, and the operation time exceeds 1 second and is 3 seconds. The probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 12 is extracted is high when the time is within the range, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is extracted is high when the operation time exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds. When the determination button 51 is not operated, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is forcibly extracted. FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation time of the enter button 51, the fluctuation pattern main part, the extraction of the second effect character, and the appearance rate of the second effect character.

  Similarly, when one second effect character is extracted from a plurality of second effect characters having different effect effects based on the obtained value of the second effect character determination counter C12, the operation time may be within 1 second. For example, the probability that the second performance character with the highest performance effect is extracted is high, and the second performance effect is higher in the order of operation time exceeding 1 second within 3 seconds and exceeding 3 seconds within 5 seconds. The probability that an effect character is extracted is lowered. When the determination button 51 is not operated, the second effect character does not appear 100%.

  Here, the contents of the second effect character will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the contents of the first effect character will also be described. FIG. 41 (A) is an explanatory view showing the contents of the first effect character and the second effect character, and FIG. 41 (B) is an explanatory view showing the effect of each second effect character. As shown in FIG. 41A, the first effect character is provided with four types of “bats”, “cross”, “ghost”, and “dracula” as characters with low effect, and the second effect character is: There are four types of characters, “Frankenstein”, “Wolf Man”, “Mummy”, and “Mako”, as characters with high performance effects. In addition, each character in the first effect character (“bat”, “cross”, “ghost”, “dracula”) is equally provided in the effect, but each character in the second effect character (“Frankenstein” "" Wolf man "" Mummy "" Mako "), as shown in FIG. 41B, the effect of" Frankenstein "is the lowest, and the effect of" Wolf man "" Mummy "increases in the order It is set so that the production effect of “Mako” is the highest.

  In addition, each 2nd production character is set up corresponding to each division change pattern, and although it explains in full detail later, "Frankenstein" "Wolf man" "Mummy" is set up corresponding to all the division change patterns. However, “Mako” is set only in the division variation pattern 62. That is, in the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, one of “Frankenstein”, “Wolf man”, and “Mummy” appears as the second effect character, and in the divided variation pattern 62, “Frankenstein” “Wolf man”. "Mummy" or "Mako" appears. This “Mako” is treated exceptionally, that is, when the variation pattern 62 is displayed as a divided variation pattern, only when the operation time is within one second, a predetermined probability (relatively low probability). ) To appear. That is, when “Mako” appears, it becomes a so-called premium reach.

  Therefore, the second effect character has a high probability that “mummy” is extracted when the operation time is within 1 second, and the probability that “wolf man” is extracted when the operation time exceeds 1 second and is within 3 seconds. When the operation time exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, the probability that “Frankenstein” will be extracted increases. Further, when the operation time is within 1 second, “Mako” may be extracted. And when there is no operation of the determination button 51, a 2nd effect character is not forcedly appeared.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not to cause the second effect character to appear based on the acquired value of the second effect character appearance counter C13, if the operation time is within one second, the probability of appearance is high. The probability of appearing in the order of operation time exceeding 1 second within 3 seconds and exceeding 3 seconds within 5 seconds is lowered. And when there is no operation of the determination button 51, a 2nd effect character is not forcedly appeared.

  Returning to FIG. 36, when the process proceeds to step S750, the CPU 140 executes other processes. The CPU 140 executes various processes in the display main control process other than the processes in steps S701 to S739 described above. Since these processes are not particularly related to the present invention, other processes in step S750 are performed. The explanation is omitted.

  When the process of step S750 ends, the CPU 140 proceeds to the process of step S760 and executes a random number update process. This performs a loop process that continuously updates the values of the random number counters C11 to C14 (see FIG. 37) in the random number update process of step S703 described above until the next reset interrupt occurs.

  The process of step S760 is the same as the random number update process of step S60 performed in the main game process described above, and the values of the random number counters C11 to C14 are updated using the remaining time of the display main control process. For example, a process of continuously incrementing (decrementing 1) or decrementing (decrementing 1) the values of the random number counters C11 to C14 until the remaining time is consumed, or each random number counter according to a predetermined formula The process etc. which continue updating the value of C11-C14 are performed.

  Next, the relationship between each division variation pattern 51, 52, 61, 62 and each counter C11-C14 is demonstrated, referring FIG. 42 thru | or FIG. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the division variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62 and the first effect character determination counter C11 in the display control circuit 111. As described above, when it is determined in step S709 (FIG. 38) that the variation pattern designation command from the main control circuit 44 input in step S705 (FIG. 36) corresponds to the divided variation pattern, When the acquired numerical value of the first effect character determination counter C11 (random number 11, 0 to 99) acquired in the random number 11 acquisition process in step S711 is 0 to 24, the “bat” is (probability 25/100), 25 to 49. Is “cross” (probability 25/100), 50-74 is “ghost” (probability 25/100), and 75-99 is “Dracula” (probability 25/100). In the process of step S735, it is displayed in a predetermined manner on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6.

  In other words, in each of the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62, the first effect character has a plurality of first effects with the same probability (25/100) by the first effect character determination counter C11 (random numbers 11, 0-99). One of the effect characters is selected. That is, in each of the divided variation patterns 51, 52, 61, 62, the first effect character has an appearance rate of 100%, and the appearance rates of the first effect characters are evenly provided.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 51 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111 (in the case of the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest)). That is, it is determined that the variation pattern designation command from the main control circuit 44 input in step S705 (FIG. 36) corresponds to the divided variation pattern 51 in step S709 (FIG. 38), and the enter button is determined in step S723. This is a case where it is determined that there is an input from 51 and it is determined that this input has selected the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 (forest).

  In this case, if the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second, the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 (random numbers 14, 13) acquired in the random number 12, 13, 14 acquisition process (FIG. 39) in step S727. 0 to 999) when the obtained numerical value is 0 to 49, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 is (probability 5/100), 50 to 199 is the fluctuation pattern main part 12 (probability 15/100), and 200 to 999 is the fluctuation. The pattern main part 13 (probability 80/100) is displayed in a predetermined manner on the display part 30 of the special symbol display device 6 in the process of step S731.

  In other words, in the divided variation pattern 51 selected when the symbol of the plus / minus 1 symbol is displayed, the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected within 1 second after the selection screen is displayed. The fluctuation pattern main part is a plurality of fluctuation pattern main parts with a high probability in the order of the fluctuation pattern main part 13 having a high production effect, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 having a medium production effect, and the fluctuation pattern main part 11 having a low production effect. One of them is selected.

  Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 1 second and is within 3 seconds, when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 299, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 (probability 30 / 100), 300 to 699, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 is displayed in a predetermined manner (probability 40/100), and 700 to 999 is the fluctuation pattern main part 13 (probability 30/100). The fluctuation pattern main part is selected with the same probability that the fluctuation pattern main part 12 with the medium effect is the highest probability, the fluctuation pattern main part 13 with the high effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 11 with the low effect is selected with the same probability. It has become.

  Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 799, the fluctuation pattern main part 11 has a probability of 80 / 100), 800 to 949, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 is displayed in a predetermined manner (probability 15/100), and when it is 950 to 999 (probability 5/100), The fluctuation pattern main part is selected with a high probability in the order of the fluctuation pattern main part 11 having a low production effect, the fluctuation pattern main part 12 having a medium production effect, and the fluctuation pattern main part 13 having a high production effect. Yes.

  If it is determined in step S723 (FIG. 38) that there is no input from the determination button 51 and it is considered that the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected, the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 is selected. Regardless of (random numbers 14, 0 to 999), the variation pattern main part 11 having the lowest rendering effect is forcibly (100%) selected in the process of step S735.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the operation time of the decision button 51 is within 1 second and the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected, in the random number 12, 13, and 14 acquisition processing (FIG. 39) in step S727 When the acquired numerical value of the second effect character determination counter C12 (random number 12, 0-99) is 0-4, “Frankenstein” is (probability 5/100), and when it is 5-19, “Wolf man” is ( When the probability is 15/100) and 20 to 99, “Mummy” is (probability 80/100), and the acquired numerical value of the second effect character appearance counter C13 (random numbers 13, 0 to 99) acquired in the process of step S727 is obtained. Is displayed in a predetermined manner on the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 in the process of step S731 only when is 0 to 89 (probability 90/100).

  In other words, in the divided variation pattern 51 selected when the symbol of the plus / minus 1 symbol is displayed, the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected within 1 second after the selection screen is displayed. If the appearance rate of the second performance character is set to 90% and appears, the “mummy” with a high production effect, the “wolf man” with a medium production effect, and the “Frankenstein” with a low production effect. One of the plurality of second effect characters is selected with a high probability in the order of.

  Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 is longer than 1 second and within 3 seconds, “Frankenstein” (probability 30 / 100), 30-69, “Wolf Man” (probability 40/100), 70-99, “Mummy” (probability 30/100), and the second presentation character appearance counter C13 has an acquired numerical value of 0 Only when it is 49 (probability 50/100), it is displayed in a predetermined manner, and the second effect character in this case is “mummy” with the highest probability of the “wolf man” with the medium effect, and the effect with the highest effect. In addition, “Frankenstein” having a low production effect is selected with the same probability.

  Similarly, if the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, “Frankenstein” (probability 80 / 100), 80-94, “Wolf Man” (probability 15/100), 95-99, “Mummy” (probability 5/100), and the obtained numerical value of the counter C13 for second effect character appearance is 0 9 (probability 10/100) is displayed in a predetermined manner. In this case, the second effect character is “Frankenstein” having a low effect, “Wolf man, The higher “mummy” order is selected with higher probability.

  Note that “Mako” having the highest effect is not set when the variation pattern main group 1 (Hayashi) is selected, and therefore does not appear regardless of the operation time of the determination button 51 of the player. ing.

  If it is determined in step S723 (FIG. 38) that there is no input from the determination button 51 and it is considered that the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected, the second effect character determination counter C12 is selected. Regardless of (random number 12, 0-99) and second effect character appearance counter C13 (random number 13, 0-99), the appearance rate of the second effect character is forcibly (100%) in the process of step S735. The second effect character is not displayed at 0%.

  44 to 52, the explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the divided variation pattern 51 shown in FIG. 43 and the counters C12 to C14, that is, the variation pattern main group on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 51 Since this is substantially the same as when 1 (forest) is selected, only the points different from FIG. 43 will be described below.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 51 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, on the selection screen of the division variation pattern 51 for displaying the plus / minus one symbol out of reach design. In this case, the variation pattern main part group 2 (sea) is selected. 44 differs from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 21, 22, and 23 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 52 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 3 (forest) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 52 to be performed. 45 differs from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 31, 32, 33 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 52 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 4 (sea) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 52 to be performed. 46 differs from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 41, 42, and 43 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 61 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, the selection screen of the division variation pattern 61 that displays the plus / minus one symbol out-of-reach symbols. In this case, the variation pattern main group 5 (soccer) is selected. 47 is different from FIG. 43 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70, that is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 51, 52, and 53 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 61 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, on the selection screen of the division variation pattern 61 for displaying the plus / minus one symbol out of reach design. In this case, the variation pattern main part group 6 (baseball) is selected. 48, only the variation pattern main part group 70 is different from FIG. 43. That is, the variation pattern main parts 61, 62, and 63 correspond to the variation pattern main parts 11, 12, and 13, respectively. Is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 61 and the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, on the selection screen of the division variation pattern 61 that displays the plus / minus one symbol out-of-reach symbols. In this case, the variation pattern main group 7 (kendo) is selected. 49 differs from FIG. 43 in the setting contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 and the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14, and when other than these, the fluctuation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected. It is the same.

  That is, FIG. 49 is different from FIG. 43 in that if the operation time of the decision button 51 is within 1 second, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 is displayed when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 199. (Probability 20/100), 200 to 999, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 is displayed (probability 70/100), that is, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 having a high production effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 71 having a low production effect in this order. It is selected by probability. If the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 1 second and is within 3 seconds, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 has a probability of 50/100 when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 499. , 500 to 999, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 is displayed (probability 50/100), that is, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 having a high production effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 71 having a low production effect are selected with the same probability. It has become. If the operation time of the decision button 51 exceeds 3 seconds and is within 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 is (probability 80/100) when the obtained numerical value of the fluctuation pattern main part determination counter C14 is 0 to 799. , 800 to 999, the fluctuation pattern main part 72 is displayed (probability 20/100), that is, the fluctuation pattern main part 71 having a low production effect and the fluctuation pattern main part 72 having a high production effect are selected in descending order of probability. It is like that.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 62 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111, that is, a big hit symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 8 (soccer) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 62 to be performed. 50 differs from FIG. 43 in the setting contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 and the second effect character and the second effect character determination counter C12 when the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second. Other than these, this is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected.

  That is, FIG. 50 differs from FIG. 43 in that the fluctuation pattern main parts 81, 82, 83 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 11, 12, 13, respectively, and the operation time of the decision button 51 is 1 second. If it is within the range, “Frankenstein” is (probability 5/100) when the obtained value of the second effect character determination counter C12 is 0 to 4, and “wolf man” is (probability 15/100) when it is 5 to 19. “Mummy” (probability 70/100) is displayed at 20 to 89, and “Mako” (probability 10/100) is displayed at 90 to 99. In this case, “Mako” having the highest effect is displayed. Appearing with a probability of 10%, the other second production characters are “mummy” with high production effect, “wolf man” with medium production effect, “Frankenstein” with low production effect It is adapted to be selected by the high probability.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 62 and each of the counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main part group 9 (baseball) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 62 to be performed. 51 differs from FIG. 43 in the setting contents of the variation pattern main part group 70 and the second effect character and the second effect character determination counter C12 when the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second. Other than these, this is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected. In other words, FIG. 51 is different from FIG. 50 only in the fluctuation pattern main part group 70. That is, the fluctuation pattern main parts 91, 92, 93 correspond to the fluctuation pattern main parts 81, 82, 83, respectively. Otherwise, it is the same as when the variation pattern main part group 8 (soccer) is selected.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the division variation pattern 62 and the respective counters C12 to C14 in the display control circuit 111. That is, the jackpot symbol (specific bonus symbol and normal bonus symbol) is displayed as a reach. This is a case where the variation pattern main group 10 (kendo) is selected on the selection screen of the divided variation pattern 62 to be selected. 52 differs from FIG. 43 in the following two points, and the other points are the same as when the variation pattern main part group 1 (forest) is selected. That is, the first point is the setting contents of the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 and the fluctuation pattern main part determining counter C14, which are the same as those in FIG. 49, and therefore the fluctuation pattern main parts 71 and 72 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to read as the fluctuation pattern main parts 101 and 102. Next, the second point is the setting contents of the second effect character and the second effect character determination counter C12 when the operation time of the determination button 51 is within one second, which is the same as FIG. 50 and FIG.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the division variation pattern selection screen, that is, the reach state is displayed, the player operates the determination button 51 as the operation means to change the position of the pointer 52. When the decision is made and the variation pattern main part group 70 is selected, the selection screen is immediately switched to the variation display screen in the special symbol display device 6, and the variation display of the special symbol is started again. Therefore, the player does not have to wait for the valid time of the decision button 51 to elapse, even after operating the decision button 51, so that the special symbol variation display is started again as before, and the game without stress. Will be able to enjoy. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a speedy game by omitting wasted time, and as a result, the game taste is improved.

  Further, the time from when the selection screen is displayed until the player presses the enter button 51, in other words, due to the elapsed time of the valid time of the enter button 51 until the player finishes the operation of the enter button 51. Since the subsequent variation display screen effects are different, the player can enjoy various variation display screens (variation patterns and characters) with various effects. The player's willingness to play increases. That is, the player's sense of technical intervention in the game is improved, and the presence of the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51 as operation means can be enhanced.

  In particular, in this embodiment, if the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short, there is a high probability that the display screen will have a highly variable effect display effect. Since the game was given a law to enhance the effect of the screen, the player began to devise the operation means while trying to find this law, and as a result, the game Interest is increased and the value of the operation means is increased. In addition, when the player finds this rule, he can obtain great joy and tries to operate the operating means based on this rule, so that the player's sense of technical intervention further increases. This law property may be other, for example, how close the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is close to a predetermined time.

  In addition, since one of a plurality of variation patterns and characters having different effects is selected and displayed by a predetermined random number process based on the operation timing of the determination button 51 by the player, that is, a predetermined random number is displayed. The processing allows players to select each variation pattern or character that has a different production effect with a predetermined probability, while maintaining uniformity and irregularity. At the same time, the development designer can very easily develop and design the gaming machine 1 having high preference. Note that the number of characters is not limited to one, and a plurality of characters may be selected.

  In particular, in this embodiment, “Mako” having the highest effect in the second effect character is the case where the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is short and only the divided variation pattern 62 corresponding to the big hit symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can be confident that if “Mako” is selected and displayed on the special symbol display device 6, it will be a big hit this time. The value of “Mako” as the second performance character is extremely increased and the value of the operation means is further increased. As a result, the gaming property of the gaming machine 1 is improved and the interest of the game is enhanced, and the player's willingness to play is remarkably increased. Increase. The variation pattern main part group 70 may also be provided with a very high value fluctuation pattern main part similar to “Mako”. Even if it does in this way, the same effect is acquired.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the signals of the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51 are directly input to the display control circuit 111 without passing through the main control circuit 44. For example, the main control circuit It is possible to avoid an input to the main control circuit 44 that rewrites the contents of the ROM 103 of the 44 and illegally generates a big hit. As a result, the anti-fraud function of the gaming machine 1 is improved, and an unexpected disadvantage to the game arcade No longer give.

  Further, when the divided variation pattern selection screen is displayed, if the player does not operate the determination button 51, the variation pattern main part having the lowest effect is forcibly selected and displayed, and Since the second effect character is not forcibly displayed, the player recognizes that a variation pattern with a very low effect is displayed when the determination button 51 is not operated, and the game In other words, the player takes the initiative to operate the cross switch 50 and the decision button 51. As a result, the value of the operation means is greatly enhanced and the existence significance thereof is increased. It becomes apparent and the technical intervention of the player is further improved.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the time until the determination button 51 is pressed is determined in three stages, but this is not limited, and There may be stages. Further, it is better that the time from when the determination button 51 is pressed until the variation pattern main part selected by changing to the selection screen on the special symbol display device 6 starts variation is as short as possible, but there is a slight time lag. In other words, it may be, for example, about 1 second as long as the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The main part of the fluctuation pattern is composed of the initial fluctuation and the main fluctuation. The fluctuation time of the initial fluctuation is that the time until the player presses the enter button 51 is short. The longer the probability that the character is displayed, the longer the character is displayed. Therefore, the initial variation may be clearly distinguished from the main variation, and the effect may be increased in proportion to the length of its own variation time. In addition, the main variation is not limited to the variation pattern described above, and it is preferable to prepare and select and display a large number of various effects with a variety of tastes such as so-called re-variation. In this way, the effect of the variation pattern main part is further increased, the game taste is improved, and the value of the operating means is increased. In addition, it is possible to give the player the impression that the reach effect is displayed in two stages of the reach effect of the initial variation and the reach effect of the main variation, which further enhances the effect of the variation pattern main part.

  Further, the number of fluctuation pattern main part groups 70 corresponding to the divided fluctuation pattern (selection screen) is 2 or 3, but the number of fluctuation pattern main part groups 70 is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is also limited. The image of the group 70 may also be an image (chemical image) with a motif other than “Lin”, “Sea”, “Soccer”, “Baseball”, and “Kendo”. In addition, images (chemical images) such as “forest”, “sea”, “soccer”, “baseball”, “kendo”, etc., which the fluctuation pattern main group 70 is converted to, can be recorded as moving images, still images, stereoscopic images, etc. If it does not deviate from the technical idea, it shall be within the scope of the design changes.

  Also, images (chemical images) such as “forest”, “sea”, “soccer”, “baseball”, “kendo”, etc., which the change pattern main part group 70 has formed, constitute the change pattern main part group 70 that has been realized. Depending on the number of variation patterns to be performed and the degree of reliability, the player may be expressed in a manner that arouses thinking. For example, in the “forest” image, “three wild birds fly off from the forest (when the number of fluctuation pattern main parts constituting the fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is three)” or the like is performed. By configuring in this way, that is, by giving the player the opportunity to go around various thoughts, the gameability is remarkably improved, and further, the player's sense of technical intervention in the game is improved, and the presence of operation means Significance increases.

  In addition, based on the operation timing of the decision button 51 by the player, one of a plurality of variation patterns or characters having different effect effects is selected and displayed by a predetermined random number process. Only the time until pressing the enter button 51, that is, without changing the random number processing, the corresponding effect effect variation pattern or character may be set and displayed. Specifically, the change pattern main part or the second effect character having the highest effect is displayed within 1 second of the operation time of the decision button 51, and the medium change is within 3 seconds after exceeding 1 second. The pattern main part and the second effect character may be displayed, and the fluctuation pattern main part and the second effect character having the lowest effect may be displayed within 3 seconds exceeding 3 seconds.

  Further, as described above, the number of fluctuation pattern main parts corresponding to one fluctuation pattern main part group 70 is set to 2 or 3, but the number of fluctuation pattern main parts is not limited, and a single number is included. It may be included.

Further, an effect generating means for generating a predetermined effect when a specific fluctuation pattern main part is selected may be provided. For example, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a jackpot is reached, the music that flows during the jackpot game is special music that is different from the normal time. With this configuration, the player becomes more interested in the operation means.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to set suitably the content and number of a 1st effect character and a 2nd effect character, for example, the character which serves as a 1st effect character and a 2nd effect character may be employ | adopted further, and also the 1st effect character Is 100% when displaying the main part of the variation pattern, but this is not limited, and may be 60% or 80%, for example.

  Further, the value of the first effect character determination counter C11 is acquired at the timing when the display control circuit 111 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control circuit 44, but this is changed to the variation pattern designation command. The left special symbol designation command, the right special symbol designation command, or the middle special symbol designation command may be acquired at the timing of reception, or the player selects the decision button in the same manner as the other counters C12, C13 and C14. It may be acquired at the timing when 51 is operated (the timing when the display control circuit 111 inputs a signal corresponding to the operation of the enter button 51), or may be acquired at other timing.

  In addition, the values of the second effect character appearance counter C13 and the variation pattern main part determination counter C14 are acquired independently, that is, the values acquired by the counters C13 and C14 are not affected. For example, when a variation pattern main part having a high effect is selected, the second effect character may appear 100% regardless of the value acquired by the counter C13 for appearance of the second effect character. On the contrary, when the second effect character does not appear, the variation pattern main portion having a low 100% effect effect may be displayed regardless of the value acquired by the variation pattern main portion determination counter C14. Similarly, the second effect character determination counter C12 also has a 100% effect effect regardless of the value acquired by the second effect character determination counter C12 when a variation pattern main part having a high effect effect is selected. A high second effect character may be determined, and conversely, when a second effect character with a low effect is determined, 100 regardless of the value acquired by the variation pattern main part determination counter C14. The main part of the fluctuation pattern having a low% effect may be displayed.

  Further, when the player does not operate the determination button 51, the appearance ratio of the second effect character is forced to 0% and is not displayed on the special symbol display device 6. Alternatively, the second effect character having the lowest effect may be forced to appear. Further, the second effect character having the least effect effect may be forced to appear only in the divided variation pattern displayed when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as a combination of special symbols. . Alternatively, if the player does not operate the enter button 51, the first effect character may be forced to have an appearance rate of 0%.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cross switch 50 and the determination button 51 are provided on the hit ball supply tray 12 as described above, but this is not limited, and for example, the surplus ball tray 13 or the outer frame 22 or the inner frame The frame 23 may be provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine 1 and the structure is not particularly limited. For example, a touch panel type that directly touches the display unit 30 of the special symbol display device 6 It may be something like this.

  The game contents of the jackpot processing may be game contents of the jackpot processing other than those described above as long as they do not deviate from this technical idea. For example, it may be a big hit game content that is adopted in so-called third type pachinko gaming machines. The special symbol display device 6 and the normal symbol display device 18 may be any device that can display symbols and numbers such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, a plasma display, and a dot matrix LED display.

  In addition, the symbol for generating the jackpot (the jackpot symbol) has been described using a predetermined three-digit symbol (special symbol). However, the jackpot symbol is not limited to three digits but may be any number of digits. . Moreover, although the above jackpot symbols have been described with the same symbol, they can be arbitrarily set, and any combination such as “ABC”, “Shochiku Ume” may be used as the jackpot symbol. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the out-of-reach symbol is only variation pattern 1, but a plurality of variation patterns may be provided.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described using the pachinko gaming machine that is one aspect of the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine where a player operates a start lever, such as a throttle gaming machine, extracts a random number related to a hit or the like, and a spinning reel is driven based on the extracted random number value. The present invention can be employed.

Next, the main correspondence between the configuration of the claims and the embodiment of the present invention will be described.
Claim 1: The game ball detection means corresponds to the start winning detection sensor 116 and the operation gate detection sensor 121, and the display command signal is a normal symbol designation command and a normal symbol stop designation command described in the text, as shown in FIG. It corresponds to a variation pattern designation command, a left special symbol designation command, a right special symbol designation command, a middle special symbol designation command and an all symbols stop designation command, the main control means corresponds to the main control circuit 44, and the symbol display device It corresponds to the special symbol display device 6 and the normal symbol display device 18 .
The display control means corresponds to the display control circuit 111, and the specific symbols are “1, 1, 1” “3, 3, 3, 3” as jackpot symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 6 shown in FIG. “5, 5, 5” “7, 7, 7” “9, 9, 9” “11, 11, 11” “13, 13, 13” “2, 2, 2” “4, 4, 4” “6, 6, 6”, “8, 8, 8”, “10, 10, 10”, “12, 12, 12”, “14, 14, 14”, and the hits displayed on the normal symbol display device 18 shown in FIG. The special game corresponding to “7” as a symbol and advantageous to the player corresponds to the jackpot process in step S391 and the start winning opening opening process in step S516, and the special game generating means controls the gaming machine shown in FIG. Device 100, random number update process of step S20, normal game process of step S30, special feature of step S40 Corresponds to the game processing, the gaming machine corresponds to the gaming machine 1, operating means, cross switch 50, corresponding to the determination button 51.

1 ... game machine, 2 ... hit control handle,
3 ... Hitting ball guide rail, 4 ... Game area formation rail,
5 ... gaming area, 6 ... special symbol display (LCD),
7 ... Grand prize opening (Attacker), 8 ... Left symbol display section,
9 ... middle symbol display part, 10 ... right symbol display part,
11 ... Starting prize opening (electric tulip), 12 ... Hit ball supply tray,
13 ... Extra ball tray, 14 ... Ordinary prize opening,
15 ... Game effect lamp, 16 ... Out port,
17 ... Glass door frame, 18 ... Normal symbol display device (7-segment LED),
19 ... Normal symbol operation gate, 20 ... Windmill,
21 ... Game board, 22 ... Outer frame,
23 ... inner frame, 25 (25a, 25b, 25c, 25d) ... hold LED,
26 (26a, 26b, 26c, 26d) ... hold LED,
27 ... One-chip microcomputer, 30 ... Display unit 37 ... Lamp control circuit, 38 ... Audio control circuit,
40 ... payout control circuit, 41 ... prize ball payout device,
42 ... Launch control circuit, 43 ... Hitting ball launcher,
44 ... main control circuit, 50 ... cross switch (operation means),
51 ... Decision button (operating means) 52 ... Pointer
60 ... Message image 70 ... Change pattern main group,
100: Game machine control device 101: Input circuit,
102 ... CPU, 103 ... ROM,
104 ... RAM, 106 ... solenoid,
107 ... Solenoid, 109 ... External information terminal,
110 ... Output circuit, 111 ... Display control circuit,
113 ... Speaker, 115 ... Bus,
116 ... Starting winning detection sensor, 117 ... Count switch,
118 ... Continuous winning switch, 119 ... Hitting ball operation handle switch,
120 ... Hitting ball operation stop switch, 121 ... Actuation gate detection sensor,
122: Safe ball detection sensor, 123 ... Count switch,
130: RAM backup 131: Test terminal
140 ... CPU, 141 ... RAM,
142 ... ROM, 143 ... VDP,
144 ... VRAM, 145 ... CGROM,
146 ... RAM, VRAM backup,
A ... Counter, B ... Counter,
D ... Counter, E ... Counter,
G ... Counter, C1 ... Big hit judgment counter,
C2 ... Left stop symbol determination counter, C3 ... Middle stop symbol determination counter,
C4: right stop symbol determination counter, C5: reach determination counter,
C6: Reach symbol mode determination counter, C7: Jackpot symbol determination counter,
C8: variation pattern determination counter, C9: hit determination counter,
C10.
C11: counter for determining the first effect character,
C12: counter for determining the second effect character,
C13: Second effect character appearance counter,
C14: Variation pattern main part determination counter,
F1 ... Big hit flag, F2 ... Reach flag,
F3 ... Reach mode flag, F4 ... Hit flag,
T ... Special symbol variation time, t ... Normal symbol variation time,
ST ... Starting prize opening opening time, T1 ... Time, T2 ... Time,
T3 ... time

Claims (15)

Game ball detecting means for detecting winning or passing of game balls;
Main control means for transmitting a predetermined display command signal based on detection of winning or passing of the game ball by the game ball detection means;
Display control means for variably displaying symbols on the symbol display device by receiving the display command signal transmitted from the main control means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game advantageous to the player when the symbol that the display control means confirms and displays on the symbol display device is a specific symbol;
A gaming machine equipped with
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Operation signal input means for inputting an operation signal from the operation means,
The operation means is set with an effective time for enabling the player's operation based on the fact that a predetermined screen that triggers the operation of the operation means is displayed on the symbol display device. Valid only when operated during the valid time,
When the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal during the effective time, the display control means quickly sets the predetermined display pattern on the symbol display device without waiting for the effective time to elapse. And a variation pattern display means for variably displaying the symbol.   A plurality of variation patterns are provided so as to produce different effects, and the variation pattern display means is configured to select one of the plurality of variation patterns based on the operation signal input means inputting the operation signal. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a variation pattern selecting unit that selects the game.   A plurality of the variation patterns are provided so as to have different production effects, and the variation pattern selection means has a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different production effects based on a predetermined law when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a variation pattern rule selecting means for selecting a variation pattern of a predetermined effect from among them, or selecting with a high probability.   The variation pattern law selection means selects a variation pattern having a high effect when the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal is shorter than a predetermined time. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the selection is made with a high probability.   When the variation pattern law selection unit selects the variation pattern with high probability, the operation signal input unit executes the random number processing based on a timing at which the operation signal is input. Item 5. A gaming machine according to item 3 or claim 4.   When the operation signal input means does not input an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time, a change pattern forced selection means for forcibly selecting a change pattern having a low effect is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:   The display control means includes character display means for displaying an effect character in a predetermined manner on the symbol display device in parallel with the symbol variation display based on the operation signal input means inputting the operation signal. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the gaming machine is provided. A plurality of the effect characters are provided so that the effects are different, and the character display means
8. The character selection means according to claim 7, further comprising: character selection means for selecting any effect character from the plurality of effect characters based on the operation signal input means receiving the operation signal. Gaming machine.   A plurality of the effect characters are provided so as to have different effect effects, and the character selecting means is configured to select a plurality of effect characters having different effect effects based on a predetermined rule when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal. 9. The gaming machine according to claim 8, further comprising character law selection means for selecting an effect character having a predetermined effect from among them or selecting with high probability.   The character law selection means selects a performance character having a high performance effect when the elapsed time of the effective time when the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal is shorter than a predetermined time, or 10. The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the selection is made with a high probability.   When the character law selection means selects the effect character with high probability, the operation signal input means is executed by a predetermined random number process based on a timing when the operation signal is input. The gaming machine according to claim 9 or claim 10.   When the operation signal input means does not input an operation signal from the operation means during the effective time, the operation signal input means includes character forced selection means for forcibly selecting an effect character having a low effect. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 9 to 11.   The said operation signal input means is provided with the character forced appearance stop means which does not make an effect character appear compulsorily, when the operation signal from the said operation means is not input during the said effective time. Item 12. A gaming machine according to any one of Items 9 to 11. Game ball detecting means for detecting winning or passing of game balls;
Main control means for transmitting a predetermined display command signal based on detection of winning or passing of the game ball by the game ball detection means;
By receiving the display command signal transmitted from the main control means, the symbol display device displays a variable number of symbols in a variable manner and stops the variable digits of the symbols in a predetermined order. , A display control means for confirming display on any of the out-of-order symbol, the reach-out symbol or the jackpot symbol;
A special game generating means for generating a special game advantageous to the player when the symbol that the display control means has determined and displayed on the symbol display device is the jackpot symbol;
A gaming machine equipped with
When the display control means confirms and displays either the out-of-reach symbol or the big hit symbol on the symbol display device, the variation pattern introductory part that shifts the symbol of the plurality of digits to the reach state, and the state of the reach A selection screen for selecting one of a plurality of morphological images obtained by merging a variation pattern main portion group in which a plurality of variation pattern main portions having different production effects are maintained, and a variation pattern for shifting to a final confirmation display Division variation pattern display means for displaying a division variation pattern that varies in the order of the main part,
An operation means capable of selecting and operating any one of the chemical images when the player displays the selection screen;
An operation signal input means for inputting an operation signal from the operation means;
Based on the timing at which the operation signal input means inputs an operation signal corresponding to any one of the chemical images by the operating means, the variation pattern main part group corresponding to the chemical image selected by the player is selected. A variation pattern main part selection means for selecting any of the fluctuation pattern main parts,
The operation means is set to a valid time during which the player's operation is valid while the selection screen is displayed on the symbol display device. The operation means is valid only when operated during the valid time. age,
When the operation signal input means inputs the operation signal during the effective time, the display control means promptly selects the variation pattern selected by the symbol display device without waiting for the effective time to elapse. A game machine comprising a variation pattern main part display means for variably displaying the symbols of the plurality of digits in the main part.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the operation signal input means is provided in the display control means.

Images